UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATION 
 
 GIFT OF THE PUBLISHER 
 No./<f<? Received /#4 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
 OF THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. 
 
 GIFT OF 
 
 Class 
 
From the collection of the 
 
 n 
 
 i-k -r m 
 Prelinger 
 
 a 
 
 JJibrary 
 
 p 
 
 San Francisco, California 
 2006 
 
ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY 
 
 A LAB OR A TOR Y MA NUA L 
 
ELEMENTARY 
 CHEMISTRY 
 
 A LABORATORY MANUAL 
 
 By 
 C. E. LINEBARGER 
 
 Instructor in Chemistry in the 
 Lake View High School, Chicago, 
 and Editor of " School Science" 
 
 RAND, McNALLY & COMPANY 
 
 CHICAGO NEW YORK LONDON 
 
vi Elementary Chemistry 
 
 the general work, the last few months of the course 
 being given to the simpler parts of it. 
 
 This Manual represents an attempt to fulfill the 
 above requirements. It contains more experiments 
 than can be performed in the usual course so as to 
 offer a considerable range and option. The Qualitative 
 Analysis is confined to the Appendix, and may well 
 serve as the basis for an advanced course. 
 
 The author takes pleasure in thanking the following 
 teachers for valuable criticisms on the manuscript : 
 Mr. Harry D. Abells, Morgan Park Academy, Morgan 
 Park, III.; Dr. C. E. Boynton, Robert Waller High School, 
 Chicago ; Miss Louella Chapin, South Division High 
 School, Chicago; Mr. Harry Clifford Doane, Central 
 High School, Grand Rapids, Midi.; Mr. Oscar R. Flynn, 
 Hyde Park High School, Chicago; Mr. Albert C. Hale, 
 Boys' High School, Brooklyn, N. Y.; Prof. Alexander 
 Smith, the University of Chicago; Mr. Charles M. 
 Turton, South Chicago High Scliool, Chicago; Prof. 
 Theodore Whittelsey, Northwestern University ; Mr. 
 C. M. Wirick, R. T. Crane Manual Training High 
 School, Chicago ; Mr. E. C. Woodruff, Lake View High 
 School, Chicago; and Mr. F. J. Watson, William 
 McKinley High Scliool, Chicago. 
 
 He also wishes to acknowledge his indebtedness to 
 the following teachers who have read the proofs of the 
 book and offered many helpful suggestions : Prof. 
 Alexander Smith, the University of Chicago; Prof. 
 G. C. Caklwell, Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y.; Mr. 
 Charles M. Turton, South Chicago High School, Chicago; 
 Mr. E. C. Woodruff, Lake Vievv High School, Chicago. 
 
 His thanks are also due Mr. W. E. Davis and Mr. 
 E. C. Woodruff for the preparation of the illustrations. 
 
 C. E. LlNEBARGER. 
 
 Chicago, April, 1904.. 
 
THE TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
 (Numbers of Experiments follow the Titles) 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Introductory i 
 
 Some Physical Properties of a Few Familiar Sub- 
 stances, i Chemical Properties of a Few Familiar Sub- 
 stances, 2 Physical and Chemical Changes, 3 Dry and 
 Wet Reactions, 4 Reactions in Gases, 5 Reaction Due 
 to Light, 6 Mixtures and Compounds, 7 Law of Con- 
 servation of Matter (Persistence of Mass), 8. 
 
 Oxygen ... 14 
 
 Oxygen from Silver Oxid, 9 Oxygen from Mercuric 
 Oxid, 10 Oxygen from Potassium Chlorate, from a Mix- 
 ture of Potassium Chlorate and Manganese Dioxid, n 
 Preparation of Oxygen from a Mixture of Potassium Chlo- 
 rate and Manganese Dioxid, 12 Oxygen from Sodium 
 Peroxid by Action of Water, 13 Properties of Oxygen, 14. 
 
 Ozone 21 
 
 Preparation of Ozone, 15 To Find the Weight of One 
 Liter of Oxygen, 16 To Find the Percentage of Oxygen 
 in Potassium Chlorate, 17. 
 
 Hydrogen 26 
 
 Hydrogen from Acids by Action of Zinc, 18 Proper- 
 ties of Hydrogen, 19 Transpiration of Hydrogen, 20 
 Combustion of Hydrogen, 21 Oxidation and Reduction, 
 22 Hydrogen from Water by Action of Sodium, 23 
 Hydrogen from Steam by Action of Magnesium, 24 
 Hydrogen from Steam by Action of Iron, 25 Hydrogen 
 from Solutions of Caustic Alkalis by Action of Aluminum, 
 26 Hydrogen from Sodium Hydroxid by Heating with 
 Iron Powder, 27 Hydrogen from Calcium Hydroxid by 
 Action of Iron Powder or Zinc Dust, 28. 
 
 Water 34 
 
 Dissolved Matter in Different Waters, 29 Distillation, 
 30 Coagulation Filters, 31 Conditions Effecting Solu- 
 tions, 32 To Determine the Solubility of Potassium 
 [vii] 
 
viii Elementary Chemistry 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Dichromate in Water, 33 To determine the Solubility of 
 Air in Water, 34 Heat Effects of Solution, 35 Super- 
 saturation, 36 Water of Crystallization, 37 To Find the 
 Percentage of Water of Crystallization in Gypsum, 38 
 Deliquescence, 39 Efflorescence, 40 Test for Water, 41 
 
 - To'Ascertain the Volumetric Composition of Water, 42. 
 
 Hydrogen Dioxid 43 
 
 Hydrogen Dioxid by Action of Sodium Peroxid on 
 Water, 43 Hydrogen Dioxid by Action of Sulfuric Acid 
 on Barium Dioxid, 44 Properties of Hydrogen Dioxid, 45 
 
 - To Verify the Law of Definite Proportions by Weight, 
 46 To Verify the Law of Definite Proportions by Vol- 
 ume, 47 To Verify the Law of Multiple Proportions, 48. 
 
 Nitrogen and Its Hydrogen Compounds 47 
 
 Separation of Nitrogen from the Air, 49 Nitrogen by 
 the Decomposition of Ammonium Nitrate, 50 Nitrogen 
 from Potassium Nitrate by Action of Iron Powder, 51 
 Ammonia from Ammonium Salts by Action of Caustic 
 Alkalis or Lime, 52 Ammonia from the Destructive 
 Distillation of Some Animal Substances, 53 Preparation 
 and Properties of Ammonia, 54 Ammonia by the Inter- 
 action of Potassium Nitrate, Potassium Hydroxid, and 
 Iron Powder, 55. 
 
 Carbon 51 
 
 Formation of Charcoal, 56 Graphite from Pig Iron, 57 
 Preparation of Lampblack, 58 Density and Porosity 
 of Charcoal, 59 Adsorption of Gases by Charcoal, 60 
 Reduction by Charcoal, 61 Decolorizing Action of Bone- 
 black, 62 Combustibility of Different Forms of Carbon, 63. 
 
 The Compounds of Carbon with Oxygen 54 
 
 Carbon Dioxid a Product of Combustion, 64 Carbon 
 Dioxid Given Off in Respiration, 65 Carbon Dioxid Pro- 
 duced by Fermentation, 66 Carbon Dioxid from a Car- 
 bonate by Action of an Acid, 67 Properties of Carbon 
 Dioxid, 68 Action of Carbon Dioxid on Litmus, 69 
 Carbon Dioxid Absorbed by Sodium or Potassium Hydroxid 
 Solutions, 70 Carbon Dioxid in Solution Dissolves Cal- 
 cium Carbonate, 71 Carbon Monoxid by Action of Sul- 
 furic Acid on Sodium Formate, 72 Carbon Monoxid by 
 
The Table of Contents ix 
 
 PAGE 
 
 the Action of Sulfuric Acid on Potassium Ferrocyanid, 73 
 
 Oxids of Carbon from Oxalic Acid, 74 To Find the 
 Weight of a Liter of Carbon Dioxid, 75. 
 
 Nitrogen and Hydrogen Compounds of Carbon .... 60 
 
 Methane from Sodium Acetate by Action of Soda-lime., 
 76 Ethylene from Alcohol by Action of Sulfuric Acid, 77 
 
 Acetylene by Action of Water on Calcium Carbid, 78 
 Destructive Distillation, 79 A Simple Gas Factory, 80 
 A Candle as a Gas Factory, 81. 
 
 The Atmosphere 62 
 
 To Determine the Percentage of Oxygen in the Air, 82 
 
 Volume of Oxygen in Air, 83 Action of Dust on the 
 Precipitation of Water Vapor, 84 To Find the Weight of 
 a Liter of Air, 85. 
 
 Fire and Flame 66 
 
 Kindling Temperature, 86 Structure of Flame, 87 
 Luminosity of Flame, 88 Speed of Propagation of Flame, 
 89 Oxidizing and Reducing Flames, 90. 
 
 Salts, Acids, and Bases 68 
 
 General Properties of Acids, 91 General Properties of 
 Bases, 92 Neutralization, 93. 
 
 Oxids of Nitrogen ; Nitric Acid 69 
 
 Preparation and Properties of Nitrous Oxid, 94 Nitric 
 Oxid ; Its Preparation and Properties, 95 Volumetric 
 Composition of Nitric Oxid, 96 Nitrogen Dioxid, 97 
 Illustration of the Law of Volumetric Proportions, 98 
 Preparation and Properties of Nitric Acid, 99 Decompo- 
 sition of Nitric Acid by Heat, 100 Reduction of Nitric 
 Acid to Ammonia, 101 Reduction of a Nitrate to a 
 Nitrite, 102. 
 
 Preparation and Properties of Acids, Bases, and Salts . . 75 
 
 Preparation of a Salt by Direct Union of the Elements, 
 IO 3 Preparation of a Salt by the Solution of a Metal in 
 an Acid, 104 Preparation of a Salt by Neutralization of 
 Ammonium Hydroxid by Hydrochloric Acid, 105 The 
 Solubility Product, 106. 
 
x Elementary Chemistry 
 
 PAGE 
 
 The Halogens and Their Hydrogen Compounds 78 
 
 Chlorin by Oxidization of Hydrochloric Acid, 107 
 Preparation of Chlorin, 108-109 Properties of Chlorin, no 
 
 Chlorin Water, in Preparation and Properties of 
 Bromin, 112 Preparation and Properties of lodin, 113 
 Tests for Free Bromin and lodin, 114 Action of Concen- 
 trated Sulfuric Acid on Halid Salts, 115 Preparation and 
 Properties of Hydrochloric Acid, 116 Analysis of Hy- 
 drogen Chlorid, 117 Tests for Chlorids, Bromids, and 
 lodids, 118 To find the Atomic Weight of Chlorin, 119 
 To Ascertain the Strength of a Given Sample of Hydro- 
 chloric Acid, 120 To find the Strength of a Given Sample 
 of Nitric Acid, 121. 
 
 The Alkali Metals 89 
 
 Properties of Sodium and Potassium, 122 Preparation 
 and Properties of Potassium Carbonate, 123 Preparation 
 and Properties of Sodium and Potassium Hydroxids, 124 
 
 Preparation and Properties of Ammonium Amalgam, 
 
 125 Solvay Process of Sodium Carbonate Manufacture, 
 
 126 Flame Tests, 127 Preparation and Properties of 
 the Nitrates_of the Alkali Metals, 128 Test for a Nitrate, 
 129. 
 
 Equivalent Weights 93 
 
 Equivalent of Sodium, 130 Equivalent of Zinc, 131 
 Equivalent of Magnesium, 132 Equivalent of Zinc, 133 
 To Determine the Vapor Density of Alcohol by Dumas' 
 Method, 134. 
 
 Sulfur and Its Compounds 97 
 
 Properties of Sulfur, 135 Preparation and Properties 
 of Hydrogen Sulfid, 136 Preparation of Sulfur Dioxid, 
 137 Properties of Sulfur Dioxid, 138 Properties of 
 Sulfurous Acid, 139 Properties of Sulfuric Acid, 140. 
 
 Phosphorus 100 
 
 Physical Properties of Phosphorus, 141 Conversion 
 of Red Phosphorus into Yellow Phosphorus, 142 Prepa- 
 ration and Properties of Phosphin, 143 Preparation of 
 Metaphosphoric Acid, 144 Preparation of Orthophos- 
 phoric Acid, 145 Reactions of Phosphates, 146. 
 
The Table of Contents xi 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Arsenic and Antimony 103 
 
 Properties of Arsenic, 147 Arsin, 148 Arsenic Tri- 
 oxid, Trichlorid, and Trisulfid, 149 Arsenic Acid, 150 
 Properties of Antimony, 151 Stibin, 152 Antimony 
 Trioxid, Trichlorid, and Trisulfid, 153. 
 
 Bismuth 105 
 
 Properties of Bismuth, 154 Reactions of Salts of Bis- 
 muth, 155. 
 
 Magnesium 106 
 
 Properties of Magnesium, 156 Reactions of Mag- 
 nesium Salts, 157 Preparation of Magnesium Sulfate, 
 158 Preparation and Properties of Calcium Oxid and 
 Hydroxid, 159 Properties of Calcium Compounds, 160 
 
 Reactions of Strontium and Barium Salts, 161. 
 
 Boron and Silicon , 108 
 
 Preparation of Boric Acid, 162 Characteristic Reac- 
 tion of Boron Compounds, 163 Borax Bead, 164 Prep- 
 aration of Magnesium Silicid and of Silicon Hydrid, 165 
 
 Preparation of Silicic Acids, 166. 
 
 Zinc no 
 
 Properties of Zinc, 167 Reactions of Zinc Salts, 168 
 
 Blowpipe Reactions, 169. 
 
 Cadmium no 
 
 Properties and Reactions, 170. 
 
 Mercury in 
 
 Preparation of Mercury, 171 Mercurous Nitrate, 172 
 
 Mercuric Nitrate, 173 Reactions of Mercurous Salts, 
 174 Reactions of Mercuric Salts, 175. 
 
 Aluminum 112 
 
 Properties of Aluminum, 176 Action of Acids and 
 Alkalis on Aluminum, 177 Action of Mordants, 178 
 Alums, 179 Reactions of Aluminum Compounds, 180. 
 
 Tin 114 
 
 Physical Properties, 181 Crystallization of Tin, 182 
 Action of Acids on Tin, 183 Preparation of a Solution 
 of Stannic Chlorid, 184 Distinction Between Stannous 
 and Stannic Salts, 185 Replacement of Tin by Zinc, 186 
 
 To Determine the Equivalent of Tin, 187. 
 
xii Elementary Chemistry 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Lead 116 
 
 Physical Properties of Lead, 188 Deposition of Lead 
 by Zinc, 189 Action of Acids on Lead, 190 Prepara- 
 tion and Properties of Lead Monoxid, 191 Preparation 
 and Properties of Red Lead, 192 Preparation and 
 Properties of Lead Dioxid, 193 Reactions of Lead Salts, 
 194 Action of Water on Lead, 195. 
 
 Copper 118 
 
 Properties of Copper, 196 Precipitate of Copper, 197 
 Preparation of Cuprous Oxid, 198 Reactions of Cop- 
 per Salts, 199 To Find the Equivalent of Copper, 200. 
 
 Silver 120 
 
 Preparation and Properties of Silver, 201 Reactions 
 of Silver Salts, 202. 
 
 Iron 121 
 
 Properties of Iron, 203 Reactions of Ferrous Salts, 
 204 Reactions of Ferric Salts, 205 Oxidation of Fer- 
 rous Salts, 206 Reduction of Ferric Salts, 207 Manu- 
 facture of Ink, 208 Borax Bead Test for Iron, 209. 
 
 Nickel 124 
 
 Reactions of Nickel Salts, 210. 
 
 Cobalt 124 
 
 Reactions of Cobalt Salts, 211 Analysis of a Nickel 
 Coin, 212. 
 
 Chromium and Manganese 125 
 
 Reactions of Chromic Salts, 213 Borax Bead Test for 
 Chromium, 214 Reduction of Chromates to Chromic 
 Compounds, 215 Properties of Chromates, 216 Reac- 
 tions of Manganous Salts, 217 Borax Bead Test for 
 Manganese, 218 Oxidation with Potassium Perman- 
 ganate, 219. 
 
 Some Organic Compounds 127 
 
 Preparation of Aldehydes, 220 Preparation of Ethyl 
 Acetate, 221 Preparation of Soap, 222 Fehling's Test 
 for Sugar, 223 Preparation of Oxalic Acid, 224 Prepa- 
 ration of Nitrobenzene, 225 Preparation of Aniline, 226. 
 
The Table of Contents xiii 
 
 PAGE 
 
 APPENDIX A 
 
 Qualitative Analysis i 
 
 Introductory Hydrochloric Acid Group Hydrogen 
 Sulfid Group Ammonium Sulfid Group Ammonium 
 Carbonate Group The Alkali Metals : Ammonium, 
 Sodium, Potassium. 
 
 APPENDIX B 
 The Metric System of Weights and Measures .... xvii 
 
 APPENDIX C 
 
 Instruments for Weighing and Measuring xix 
 
 The Thermometer The Barometer Balances Grad- 
 uated Vessels. 
 
 APPENDIX D 
 
 Tables xxvi 
 
 Physical Constants of some of the Elements Tension 
 of Water Vapor Solutions to be Prepared. 
 
 APPENDIX E 
 
 Significant Figures and Forms of Record in Quantitative 
 
 Work xxxi 
 
 APPENDIX F 
 
 Laboratory Equipment xxxvi 
 
 List A, Individual Apparatus List B, Table Appa- 
 ratus List C, Demonstration Apparatus List D, 
 Chemicals. 
 
EXPERIMENTS 
 
 INTRODUCTORY 
 
 EXPERIMENT i. Some Physical Properties of a 
 Few Familiar Substances. What information do 
 your senses of sight, of smell, of taste, of hearing, and 
 of feeling give you in regard to the following sub- 
 stances : Charcoal, sulfur, paraffin, common salt (sodium 
 chlorid), sugar, naphthalene (moth balls), borax, salt- 
 peter (potassium nitrate), alcohol ? Tabulate the results 
 of your observations in the form outlined below. 
 
 Put some (S mm - or i cm - circle 1 ) of each of the sub- 
 stances examined above in a test tube (a separate tube 
 for each substance), fill the tube a third full of water, 
 and note whether the substance sinks or swims. Shake 
 the substance and water well together 2 and see if it 
 dissolves. Heat the water to boiling 3 in the flame of a 
 Bunsen burner 4 and note anything that happens. Set 
 the tubes aside until cold (leave the one containing 
 the charcoal for several hours) and note any changes. 
 Tabulate your observations in the form outlined below: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Behavior in 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Water 
 
 SUBSTANCE 
 
 Sight 
 
 Smell 
 
 Taste 
 
 Hear- 
 
 Feeling 
 
 Specific gravity, 
 solubility, etc. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ing 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Cold 
 
 Hot 
 
 
 color 
 
 odor 
 
 sweet 
 
 ring 
 
 hard 
 
 
 
 
 opacity 
 
 
 sonr 
 
 thud 
 
 soft 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 
 [I] 
 
Elementary Chemistry 
 
 Fig. I ONE WAY OF SHAKING THE CONTENTS 
 
 OF A TEST TUBE 
 
 Which of your senses gives you the most information ? 
 What tests serve to identify each of the substances? 
 
 NOTE i. Estimation of Amounts of Substances. Many chem- 
 icals come in powdered form or may be easily reduced to a powder. 
 
 If a circle of given diameter be drawn on a piece of paper and as 
 
 much of the powder as 
 possible placed upon it so 
 as to form a conical heap 
 whose base is the circle, 
 fairly definite amounts of 
 the powder are obtained. 
 In the directions the 
 diameter in centimeters 
 is given right after the 
 weight in case the sub- 
 stance in use is a powder; 
 as, (s cm - circle). If the 
 substance is not powdered 
 and it is not convenient 
 to reduce it to a powder, 
 
 the amount may be expressed in terms of the size of a single piece; 
 
 this is given in millimeters. Thus, bim. means that a piece 
 
 should be selected or prepared that is equivalent in size to one of 
 
 spherical shape &mm. \\\ diameter. 
 
 Such estimations need not be made 
 
 very accurately, as even rather 
 
 wide deviations will not essentially 
 
 affect the experiment. 
 
 Note that the unit employed in 
 
 designating amounts of powders is 
 
 centimeters, while that used in 
 
 denoting the size of single pieces is 
 
 millimeters. 
 
 NOTE 2. To Shake a Liquid 
 
 and Solid Together in a Test 
 
 Tube, (i) Gently tap the rounded 
 
 end of the tube held as horizontally 
 
 as possible in the palm of the hand 
 
 (Fig. i). (2) Close the tube with 
 
 the thumb and invert it. The first 
 
 method is to be used when the 
 
 liquid is hot or corrosive. 
 
 NOTE 3. Handling Test Tubes. 
 
 Test tubes may be held by the 
 
 upper end in the lingers (Fig. 2) 
 
 generally without inconvenience, 
 
 but if the liquid is to be boiled for 
 
 some time or the substance is to be heated to a high temperature 
 
 in the test tube, it may be grasped and held with a test tube 
 
 holder, several forms of which are on the market. A serviceable 
 
 Fig. 2 TEST TUBE-HEED IN THE- 
 
 FINGERS 
 
Experiments 
 
 test tube holder may readily be made of rather stout wire, the ends 
 of which are twisted into coils into which the tube just fits, while 
 the middle part is twisted together and inserted in a handle of 
 wood or cork (Fig. 3). A substitute for a test 
 
 Fig. 3 TEST TUBE 
 
 HOLDER 
 
 tube holder is a strip of paper folded and passed 
 around the test tube just below its mouth so 
 that the two ends of the paper may be held 
 between the thumb and forefinger (Fig. 4) or 
 by tongs (Fig. 5). 
 
 In heating test tubes containing a liquid, the 
 outside of the tube must be dry and the glass 
 heated uniformly and gradually. It should be 
 held in the upper part of the flame and should 
 at first be passed to and fro through it. The 
 flame should never be allowed to touch any 
 part of the tube which is not covered on the 
 inside with the 
 liquid, as the 
 bare glass may 
 become so high- 
 ly heated that 
 if the compara- 
 tively cold liquid touches it, it may 
 break. When a liquid is being 
 boiled vigorously in a test tube, it 
 sometimes happens that portions 
 of the hot liquid are thrown out of 
 the tube with considerable force. 
 This may be avoided by holding 
 the tube in an inclined position 
 and continually rolling it to and 
 fro and moving it around in the 
 flame. Be very careful always to 
 hold the mouth of the tube away 
 from yourself as well as your neigh- 
 bors, so that in case the liquid does 
 spurt out, it will not harm any one. 
 Test tubes should always be 
 cleaned as soon as possible after 
 using. A test tube swab or cleaner which compares favorably 
 with the bristle ones sold by the dealers may be made out of a 
 wooden stick with a bit of sponge or rag tied over its end. 
 
 NOTE 4. Bunsen Burners. Bunsen burners are not only an 
 indispensable source of heat in all laboratories provided with gas, 
 but are also used in slightly modified form in gas stove and 
 "Welsbach" burners. The construction of a Bunsen burner is 
 shown in Fig. 6. The gas enters at e and passes up through 
 the opening at in into the tube n. Air is drawn in through the 
 holes at the base of n, and mixes with the gas. These holes can 
 be more or less closed by means of a ring 0, perforated with two 
 corresponding holes a. The mixture of gas and air issuing from 
 
 Fig. 4 TEST TUBE HELD BY 
 
 STRIP OF PAPER 
 
Elementary Chemistry 
 
 1 
 
 
 Fitf. 5 TEST TUBE HELD BY STRIP OF PAPER 
 
 GRASPED BY TONGS 
 
 the top of the tube burns with an almost non-luminous flame. 
 
 When the supply of air is cut off by turning the ring b, the flame 
 
 becomes luminous and 
 
 smoky. 
 
 To put a Bunsen burner 
 
 in good condition, unscrew 
 
 the tube , and clean, if 
 
 necessary, the gas tip at 
 
 m. The ring should move 
 
 freely around the tube. 
 
 Put the burner together 
 
 again and, connecting e 
 
 with the gas supply by 
 
 means of rubber hose of 
 
 suitable length, open wide 
 
 the gas cock. As soon as 
 
 the gas seems to be escap- 
 ing freely, light it. If the 
 
 burner is in order and the 
 
 airholes at in are wide 
 
 open, the flame should be 
 
 blue, with the exception of a minute yellow spot near the top of the 
 flame. If this spot does not appear in the 
 ^ flame, partially close the airholes until it is 
 
 seen. If the flame is at all luminous, even 
 when the airholes are wide open, the supply 
 of gas is too great for the supply of air. So 
 unscrew the tube n, and make ;;/ a little 
 smaller by pinching or hammering it together 
 somewhat. If the flame is too small and 
 burns with a hissing noise, open ;;/ a little. 
 Never use a burner unless it is in perfect work- 
 ing condition. If the gas supply is insufficient, 
 the flame will often "strike back," /. e., the 
 gas will burn at m instead of d. When this 
 occurs the tube n soon becomes so hot that it 
 cannot be handled, and the flame appears 
 green and smoky, and emits an unpleasant 
 odor. As soon as you find that a flame has 
 " struck back," cut off the supply of gas, and 
 after a minute or so relight. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 2. Some 
 Chemical Properties of a 
 Few Familiar Substances. 
 
 Put a piece (3 mm.^ o f charcoal 
 in a clean iron spoon and 
 hold it in a Bunsen flame 
 (Fig. 7). Observe carefully 
 
 Fig. 6 BUNSEN BURNER 
 
Experiments 
 
 the behavior of the charcoal. Heat as hot as possible 
 until no further change is manifest. Go through similar 
 operations with the substances used in Experiment i, 
 taking a piece not larger than 3 mm -, and noting the 
 appearance of flame, color, and odor of fumes, appear- 
 ance and relative amount of ash, and in case the sub- 
 stance does not seem to burn, whether it swells up 
 or melts. Which of 
 the substances are not 
 changed chemically ? 
 What tests can you 
 add to those you found 
 in Experiment i ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 3. 
 Physical and Chem- 
 ical Changes, (a) 
 Hold a piece of plati- 
 num wire in a Bunsen 
 flame for a minute or so, 
 and note what occurs. 
 Let the wire cool and 
 see if it has been per- 
 manently changed. 
 
 (b) Go through the 
 same operations as in 
 (#), using magnesium 
 
 Wire Or ribbon instead Fig - T-HEATING A SUBSTANCE IN A SPOON 
 
 of platinum. Compare restilt with that obtained in (a). 
 Compare the nature of the changes in (a) and (b). 
 
 (c) Wind tightly around one of the ends of each 
 of two electric light carbons (not "coppered") about 
 10 cm - of pieces of copper wire about \$cm. long. Con- 
 nect the other ends of the wires with a source of elec- 
 tricity and immerse the lower halves of the carbons 
 in a strong solution of copper sulfate (blue vitriol) 
 
Elementary Chemistry 
 
 contained in a beaker or tumbler (Fig-. 8). Keeping 
 the carbons about a centimeter apart, let the current 
 pass for a few minutes. Then remove and examine 
 the carbons. Is there any evidence that a chemical 
 change has taken place ? Are both carbons affected in 
 the same way ? Compare this result with that obtained 
 by causing a current of electricity to pass through a 
 wire (incandescent bulb). 
 
 (d) Place a little (2 cm - circle) table salt in a test 
 tube and half fill the tube with water. Close the tube 
 with the thumb and shake until most of the salt has 
 disappeared. Filter 5 , catching the filtrate (the liquid 
 which passes through the paper) in a clean evaporating 
 dish. Does the filtrate taste salty ? Set the dish on a 
 
 ring of a retort stand 
 (Fig. 9) and heat, using 
 a large flame and play- 
 ing it around so that 
 the dish is heated uni- 
 formly and the bottom 
 not more than the 
 sides. Conduct all 
 
 Fig. 8 ELECTRIC LIGHT CARBONS CONNECTED 
 WITH A BATTERY BY MEANS OF COPPER 
 WIRES AND IMMERSED IN A COPPER SUL- 
 
 WITH A BATTERY BY MEANS OF COPPER r ~ rp ,f ,-, 11 -rr Qn fV, p f n nn A 
 
 ^ S 
 
 FATE SOLUTION 
 
 o f t ft Q liquid may 
 spatter out of the dish and be lost. As the water boils 
 away a white substance is deposited, w^hich, when most 
 of the water has been driven off, crackles or decrepitates. 
 The decrepitation is due to particles of the solid enclos- 
 ing minute amounts of water, which are expelled with 
 explosive violence when the solid is heated. When the 
 decrepitation ceases let the dish cool and examine its 
 contents. Give all your reasons for thinking it to be 
 the substance you take it to be. Are the changes phys- 
 ical or chemical ? 
 
Experiments 
 
 (c) Put some (2 cm - circle) powdered marble in a 
 test tube about a third full of water. Close the tube 
 
 with the thumb and 
 shake well. Does any 
 of the marble seem to 
 dissolve ? Decant the 
 liquid, i. e., pour it off 
 from the solid so as to 
 have as little as pos- 
 sible of the latter go 
 with it, on a filter (Fig. 
 10), and catch the fil- 
 trate in a clean evap- 
 orating dish. Heat 
 the dish as directed in 
 (d) until no more 
 liquid is left. Is there 
 more than a trace of 
 a solid residue ? What do you conclude about the solu- 
 bility of marble in water ? Pour 6 enough dilute hydro- 
 chloric acid on the marble left 
 in the test tube to fill it about 
 one-fourth full. Warm gently 
 so as to keep up a brisk evolu- 
 tion of gas. When the effer- 
 vescence ceases filter through 
 a fresh filter paper and catch 
 the filtrate in a clean evapo- 
 rating dish. Now heat the 
 liquid and evaporate it to dry- 
 ness. Is there any decrepi- 
 tation ? Cautiously taste a bit 
 of the residue not larger than 
 a pin head. Does it taste 
 salty ? Point out the physical 
 
 Fig. 9 EVAPORATING TO DRYNESS WITH FREE 
 
 OR BARE FLAME 
 
 Fig. 10 FILTERING 
 
Elementary Chemistry 
 
 2 3 
 
 Fig. II SUCCESSIVE STEPS IN FOLDING A FILTER PAPER 
 
 and chemical changes. Let the dish containing the 
 residue stand for at least twenty-four hours and then 
 examine it. It will probably have attracted moisture 
 from the air and will be moist or even liquid if the 
 amount of water attracted is sufficient to dissolve it. 
 
 The substance is on 
 this account said to be 
 deliquescent; its name 
 is calcium chlorid. 
 
 Fig. 12 POURING LIQUID FROM A BOTTLE 
 
 INTO A TEST TUBE 
 
 NOTE 5. Filtering. 
 Filter paper is fitted into 
 a. funnel as follows : The 
 paper is folded to form a 
 semi-circle and then a 
 quarter of a circle (Fig. 1 1). 
 Three of the quarters are 
 
 separated from the fourth so as to form a cone which is fitted into 
 
 the funnel, wetted and smoothed around so as to fit the funnel. 
 When pouring a liquid on a filter, direct the stream of liquid so 
 
 that it strikes against the side of the paper cone and not into the 
 
 apex, otherwise there is danger of splashing. (Fig. 10.) 
 
 The stern of the funnel should touch the inside of the receiver 
 
 of the filtrate so as to 
 
 prevent the formation of 
 
 drops which by their fall 
 
 might occasion splashing. 
 NOTE 6. Pouring a 
 
 Liquid from a Bottle. In 
 
 pouring hold the bottle in 
 
 the right hand with the 
 
 thumb close to the label 
 
 and the little finger under 
 
 the bottom (Fig."i2). Re- 
 move the stopper with the 
 
 second and third fingers 
 
 of the left hand, the thumb 
 
 and first finger of which 
 
 Fig. 13 POURING FROM ONE BOTTLE INTO 
 
 ANOTHER 
 
Experiments 
 
 hold the test tube or other receptacle. Remove the drop of liquid 
 that may adhere to the lip of the bottle by touching it with the 
 stopper, replace the stopper and return the bottle to its proper 
 place. The stoppers and bottles may also be held as shown in Fig. 
 13. Stoppers should never be placed upon the table top except in 
 extreme cases, and then only upon a piece of clean paper or glass. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 4. Dry and Wet Reactions, (a] Rub 
 
 together in a dry mortar a pinch of mercuric chlorid 
 with a pinch of potassium iodid. 
 What is the color and solubility 
 of the product ? 
 
 (b) Dissolve a pinch of mer- 
 curic chlorid in enough water to 
 fill a test tube about half full ; 
 also a pinch of potassium iodid 
 in about the same volume of 
 water in a second test tube. Mix 
 the solutions. How does the 
 color and solubility of the prod- 
 uct compare with that obtained 
 in (a) ? In which case does the 
 reaction take place the more 
 rapidly ? 
 
 (c) Mix together on a piece 
 of dry paper about equal bulks 
 (3 cm - circle) of powdered sodium 
 bicarbonate (baking soda) or 
 sodium carbonate (washing 
 soda) with powdered tartaric or 
 oxalic acid. Is there any appa- 
 rent change ? Put the mixture 
 in a beaker a fourth full of 
 water. What happens ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 5. Reactions in Gases. Select two 
 wide-mouthed bottles or jars of the same size. Put in 
 one a couple of drops of strong hydrochloric acid and 
 
 Fig. 14 CYLINDRICAL JARS 
 
 PLACED MOUTH TO MOUTH 
 
io Elementary Chemistry 
 
 cover the mouth of the bottle with a card. Likewise 
 put a couple of drops of strong ammonia water in the 
 other. Move the covered bottles around so that as 
 much of their inside surfaces as possible may be wetted. 
 Both the liquids give off vapors which are thus made to 
 fill the bottles. Place one bottle on the other in an 
 inverted position (Fig. 14) and slip out the cards. What 
 evidence is there that a reaction has taken place ? What 
 is the nature of the product ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 6. Reaction Due to Light. Procure 
 a piece of blue-print paper which has not been exposed 
 to a strong light and tear it in two. Place one of the 
 halves between the leaves of a book so as to keep it 
 from the light and expose the other for ten minutes to 
 direct sunlight, or if that be not available, leave it on 
 the desk until the next laboratory period. Place both 
 pieces of paper in a dish and run water over them to 
 wash out any soluble coloring matter and compare the 
 color of the two pieces. What evidence is there that a 
 chemical reaction has taken place ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 7. Mixtures and Compounds. I. 
 (a) Put a pinch of powdered iron or clean and fine 
 iron filings on a piece of smooth paper and move one 
 end of a bar magnet over the underside of the paper 
 just beneath the iron. Can the iron be drawn from 
 one part of the paper to another ? 
 
 (b) Perform a similar experiment with powdered 
 sulfur instead of iron. 
 
 (c) Put a pinch of powdered iron in a small test 
 tube and pour over it enough carbon bisulfid to fill the 
 tube about an eighth full. Shake thoroughly. Does 
 the iron seem to dissolve? 
 
 (d) Decant the liquid into a watch glass and allow 
 it to evaporate in the hood or out of doors. Is more than 
 a trace left ? 
 
Experiments I I 
 
 (c) Repeat (c) and (d) with powdered sulfur instead 
 of iron. What is the residue ? How do you know ? 
 
 (f) Compare the solubility of iron and sulfur in 
 carbon bisulfid. 
 
 (g) Put a pinch of powdered iron in a small test 
 tube and cover it with dilute hydrochloric acid. What 
 occurs ? Note particularly any odor. Wet a small piece 
 of filter paper with a few drops of lead acetate solution 
 and cover the mouth of the test tube with it. Does it 
 change color ? 
 
 (//) Repeat (g) with sulfur instead of iron. Com- 
 pare the solubility of iron and sulfur in hydrochloric 
 acid. Are the above tests sufficient to distinguish iron 
 from sulfur? 
 
 (i) Weigh out 5.6 ff- of powdered iron and 3.2 & of 
 powdered sulfur and mix them thoroughly in a mortar. 
 What is the color of the mixture ? 
 
 (j) Place a pinch of the mixture on a piece of 
 paper and see if you can separate the iron from the 
 sulfur by moving a magnet under it as in (a). 
 
 (k) Put a little of the mixture in a small dry test 
 tube, add carbon bisulfid and shake thoroughly. Decant 
 upon a dry filter and catch the filtrate in a watch glass. 
 What is left after the carbon bisulfid evaporates ? Com- 
 pare with (d) and (c). 
 
 (/) Place a pinch of the mixture in a test tube and 
 add dilute hydrochloric acid. Compare with (g) and (//). 
 
 (;//) Now put all of the mixture that remains in 
 a rather small dry test tube and, using a test tube 
 holder, hold just the rounded end of the tube steadily 
 in the tip of a Bunsen flame until the lower part of the 
 mixture begins to glow. Then immediately remove 
 the tube from the flame. 
 
 (n) When the test tube is cool lay it on a piece of 
 paper and break it by tapping it with a pestle. Separate 
 
12 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 the substance from the particles of glass and pulverize 
 it in a mortar. Compare its appearance with that of the 
 sulfur and iron and their mixture before heating. 
 
 (o) Place a pinch of the product on paper and test 
 it with a magnet as in (a) and (/). Compare with (a). 
 
 (p) Treat a little with carbon bisulfid as in (c), (d), 
 and (k). Result? 
 
 (</) Add hydrochloric acid to another portion as 
 in (), (/?), and (/). Note the smell of the gas and its 
 action on lead acetate paper. Compare with (g) and 
 (//). Point out all the chemical and physical changes 
 in this experiment. Are the properties of the product 
 from (;//) different enough from those of iron and sulfur 
 to characterize it as a new substance ? Why were defi- 
 nite amounts of the two elements taken ? 
 
 II. (a) Examine some gunpowder for its physical 
 properties ; apply the tests used in Experiment i. Place 
 a pinch of gunpowder in a spoon and heat it as you 
 did in Experiment 2 ; be careful not to lean over the 
 spoon, as the powder may flash up into the face. Put 
 about 3 ff- (3 cm - circle) of gunpowder in a test tube and 
 add enough carbon bisulfid to fill the test tube about 
 a quarter full. Filter through a small, dry filter paper 
 and catch the filtrate in a clean watch crystal. Set in 
 the hood to evaporate and determine by appropriate 
 tests what the residue is. 
 
 CAUTION. Carbon bisulfid forms with air an 
 explosive mixture. Do not neglect to extinguish 
 all flames within a yard of you before using it. 
 
 (b] Spread out the filter paper and shake out upon 
 it the residue in the test tube, so that the carbon bisul- 
 fid may evaporate. 
 
 (r) Put this residue in a test tube and fill about one- 
 third full of water. Shake the solid and the liquid 
 
Experiments 
 
 together thoroughly, and heat for a moment to boiling. 
 Filter into an evaporating dish, and evaporate to dry- 
 ness over a bare flame. 
 
 (d) Examine the residue obtained as in Experiments 
 i and 2. Give all your reasons for thinking it to be the 
 substance you take it to be. Shake the black substance 
 remaining in the test tube out on the filter paper and 
 spread it out so 
 that the water 
 may evaporate. 
 
 (c) Examine 
 the residue when 
 dry to find out 
 what it is, and 
 give your proofs 
 for what you take 
 it to be. Into 
 how many con- 
 stituents have 
 you decomposed 
 or analyzed gun- 
 powder ? Which 
 
 Fig. J S CHASLYN BALANCE AND ERLENMEYER FLASK 
 Used in illustrating Law of Conservation of Matter 
 
 of them are ele- 
 
 ments ? 
 
 (/) Put some (i cm - circle) saltpeter in a mortar, add 
 about half its btilk of sulfur and grind the substances 
 to a fine powder. Add an equal bulk of charcoal and 
 grind all well together, but do not use too great a pres- 
 sure. Put a pinch of the mixture in a spoon and apply 
 a flame. What happens ? What new substance have 
 you prepared from saltpeter, sulfur, and charcoal ? Is 
 it a mixture or a compound ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 8. Law of Conservation of Matter 
 (Persistence of Mass). Fit an Erlenmeyer flask with 
 a tight stopper and fill the flask about a third full of 
 
14 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 strong lead acetate solution. Fill a test tube which is 
 small enough to slip inside the flask with a strong solu- 
 tion of ferric chlorid and carefully put it in the flask so 
 as not to mix the two liquids. Insert the cork tightly 
 and counterpoise the whole on a balance. (Fig. 15.) 
 Then tip the flask upside down so as to mix the two 
 solutions and, placing the flask again upon the balance 
 pan, see if the equilibrium has been destroyed. What 
 evidence is there that a chemical action has taken 
 place ? Wherein does this experiment illustrate the 
 law in question ? 
 
 OXYGEN 
 
 EXPERIMENT 9. Oxygen from Silver Oxid. Put 
 
 some (2 cm - circle) silver oxid in a test tube and, holding 
 the tube with tongs (Fig. 5), heat it in a Bunsen flame. 
 Bring a splinter of wood with a spark on its end into 
 the mouth of the test tube from time to time and note 
 what happens. Heat until the brown powder is turned 
 into a white mass. How can you prove this to be 
 silver ? How do you know that a gas is given off ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 10. Oxygen from Mercuric Oxid. 
 Put enough mercuric oxid in an ignition tube 7 to fill 
 it to the depth of about a centimeter. Grasping the 
 tube with a test tube holder, heat it in a Bunsen flame, 
 very gradually raising its temperature as high as pos- 
 sible. Note any change in the color of the powder as it is 
 being heated. When the tube is red hot, insert (with- 
 out removing it from the flame) a splinter of wood with 
 a spark on its end. What happens? How do you 
 account for it ? After the tube is cool, what is the color 
 of the mercuric oxid which is left ? Is this change of 
 color of a physical or a chemical nature ? Examine the 
 deposit (sublimate} in the upper part of the tube, and 
 find out by its physical properties what it is. 
 
Experiments 1 5 
 
 NOTE 7. Ignition Tubes. Ignition tubes are made of a spe- 
 cial kind of glass, often called "hard glass," which can with- 
 stand a very high temperature without melting. They should 
 be heated very gradually, as, being made of thicker glass than 
 ordinary test tubes, they are liable to break the more readily 
 when heated. 
 
 To make an ignition tube, choose a piece of hard glass (thick- 
 walled ordinary glass will do) about 8 mm. i n diameter, $mm. in 
 bore, and 12 to \^cm J long. Heat the tubing in the middle in a 
 Bunsen flame (better, a blast lamp flame) just above the yellow 
 spot, holding the ends in either hand and rotating the tube so as 
 to heat it uniformly. As soon as the glass begins to soften and 
 yield a little, pull it apart a little, keeping it in the flame and 
 rotating it all the while. Draw it apart very slowly so that the 
 glass of the closed end may be thick enough. When the tube 
 separates hold one part up with its closed end in the flame so that 
 it may be rounded off a little and, removing the tube from the 
 flame, blow gently into it so as to make the end slightly bulb- 
 shaped. Let the tubes cool very slowly, /. e. t anneal them by 
 closing the airholes of the burner, and holding them in the 
 smoky flame until they are covered with a deposit of soot. 
 
 EXPERIMENT IT. Oxygen from Potassium Chlo- 
 rate, and from a Mixture of Potassium Chlorate 
 and Manganese Dioxid. Fill a test tube to a depth 
 of about 2 cm - with potassium chlorate, and holding it 
 with a test tube holder, heat the rounded end in a 
 Bunsen flame. When the solid melts and effervesces 
 freely, insert a glowing splinter of wood into the mouth 
 of the test tube. Drop little bits of wood (not more 
 than 2 mm.} down into the effervescing melt. What 
 happens ? 
 
 Remove the test tube from the flame and as soon 
 as the effervescence ceases, slide a pinch (be sure not to 
 use too much) of powdered manganese dioxid from a 
 creased paper into the melted potassium chlorate. In 
 what way does the result show that a mixture of potas- 
 sium chlorate and manganese dioxid gives off oxygen 
 at a lower temperature than the former substance 
 alone? WhenUhe tube is cool, fill it with water and 
 let it soak for several hours ; the melt may then be 
 easily removed. 
 
i6 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 EXPERIMENT 12. Preparation of Oxygen from a 
 Mixture of Potassium Chlorate and Manganese 
 Dioxid. Mix about 30^- (^cm, circle) of powdered 
 potassium chlorate with about a third of its bulk of 
 manganese dioxid and transfer to a dry flask (200 to 
 300 c - c -}. Bore a hole through a cork 8 , fitting the neck 
 of the flask so that an L-tube 9> ! may be pushed 
 through it. Slip over one branch of the L-tube one 
 end of a piece of rubber tubing about 30 cm - long, whose 
 other end is slipped over a delivery tube ! ! . Set the 
 flask on a wire gauze ] 2 on a ring of a stand and secure 
 the neck of the flask with a second ring (Fig. 16). 
 
 Alternate Apparatus. (Fig. 17.) A retort is pro- 
 vided with a delivery tube and is supported on a ring 
 stand over a wire gauze or sand bath 1 2 . 
 
 Place the mixture in the flask or retort, and heat 
 with a small flame, removing the flame if the evolution of 
 
 the gas becomes 
 too brisk. Collect 
 five receivers full 
 by water displace- 
 ment 13 , and pass 
 to Experiment 14. 
 
 NOTE 8. To Per- 
 forate Corks. To 
 
 perforate a cork, a 
 round ("rat-tail") file 
 about i$cm. long is 
 required. A cork is 
 chosen of such a size 
 that its narrower end 
 fits a little loosely in 
 the neck of the flask, retort, etc. The cork is softened in a cork 
 squeezer or by rolling it on (i) the table top under a board ; or (2) 
 on the floor under the sole of the shoe. The tip of the tang of 
 the file is heated to redness and the red-hot point used to burn a 
 small and regular hole through the axis of the cork. This hole is 
 then enlarged with the file until the glass tube can just be passed 
 through it by employing a twisting motion. 
 
 Fig. l6 HEATING A SUBSTANCE IN A FLASK AND 
 
 COLLECTING THE GAS EVOLVED 
 
Experiments 
 
 Fig. 17 HEATING A SUBSTANCE IN A RETORT AND COLLECTING THE GAS EVOLVED 
 
 BY WATER DISPLACEMENT 
 
 Cork borers may also be used. These are tubes of brass or 
 steel, with a cutting edge, and are of various sizes, so as to cut a 
 hole of very nearly the desired diameter at once. 
 
 NOTE 9. To Cut Glass Tubing. To cut glass tubing, a three- 
 cornered file about 25 cm. long is needed. The tube is laid flat 
 upon the table, and a deep scratch made with the file at the point 
 where the tube is to be cut. The tube is then grasped with the 
 two hands, one on each side of the scratch, while the thumbs are 
 brought together just at the scratch, but on the side opposite. 
 While the fingers are pulling on the tube in the direction of its 
 length, a slight push with the thumbs across the axis of the tube 
 usually suffices to break it squarely off. 
 
 When a piece of glass tubing is cut the ends have sharp edges 
 which may cut rubber tubing slipped over them. The edges 
 should be smoothed down or " fire polished" by gradually heating 
 them in a flame, all the while twirling the tubing so that the 
 edges are heated uniformly, until the glass softens and the sharp 
 edges become rounded off, but care should be taken that the bore 
 of the tube is not at all lessened. 
 
 NOTE 10. To Bend Tubing. To bend glass tubing, hold it in 
 a flat luminous flame, such as that offered by an ordinary gas jet 
 (a so-called "bat-wing," "fish-tail," or "wing-top" may be put 
 on the Bunsen burner). Rotate the tube and move it to and fro 
 so as to heat a portion of the tube at least ^cm. in length. When 
 the tube begins to soften let it almost by its own weight bend 
 around to the desired shape. Do not try to bend it suddenly or 
 apply any considerable force. The bend should be very gradual 
 and the bore of the tube remain unchanged in the bend. Always 
 
i8 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 " fire-polish " the ends of the tube. Such a tube is often called an 
 "L-tube," from its resemblance to the letter L. 
 
 NOTE ii. Putting Apparatus Together. In putting together 
 the parts of an apparatus, it is very necessary that they make 
 tight joints. The corks should be well softened and the tubes 
 inserted firmly. It is a good plan to lubricate glass tubing with 
 glycerin, vaseline, or even water. The best way to test an 
 apparatus for gas-tightness is either to compress the air in it by 
 blowing or draw some out by suction. As usually some part of 
 
 the apparatus is 
 under water, the 
 water will thereby be 
 made to rise or fall in 
 a tube, and if there is 
 any leak, this water 
 will change its level 
 when the opening 
 where the lips were 
 applied is closed. To 
 attempt to use leaky 
 apparatus is to lose 
 time and labor, and 
 to insure the failure 
 of the experiment. 
 
 NOTE 12. Heat- 
 ing Glass Vessels. 
 In heating glass ves- 
 sels, wire gauze (best 
 of copper) is usually 
 employed. Sand 
 baths may also be 
 used, and consist of 
 a shallow iron dish containing a little sand. Serviceable ones 
 may be made out of tin-pail or tin-can covers. Squares of asbestos 
 paper are also used in many laboratories. The object of thus 
 interposing a screen is to distribute the heat and render the glass 
 less liable to crack. 
 
 NOTE 13. Collecting Gases by Water Displacement. This 
 method consists in filling wide-mouthed vessels brimming full of 
 water, covering them tightly with a piece of paper, cardboard 
 or glass, inverting them with the cover pressed against the mouth, 
 placing them mouth downward in a dish filled with water (techni- 
 cally named a pneumatic trough), and removing the cover. The 
 pressure of the atmosphere keeps the water in the vessels, or 
 receivers, as they are commonly called. Most pneumatic troughs 
 are provided with a shelf less than an inch below the surface 
 of the water (Fig. 17), on which the receivers are set. The gas 
 which is evolved is made to pass up into the receiver by means of 
 a delivery tube, and to displace the water. 
 
 Only gases which are but slightly soluble in water can be col- 
 lected by water displacement. 
 
 Fig. 1 8 STOPCOCK FUNNEL GAS GENERATOR AND 
 
 CYLINDER FOR COLLECTING THE GAS 
 
Experiments 
 
 Fig. 19 HOME-MADE 
 
 STOPCOCK FUNNEL, 
 
 NO. I 
 
 EXPERIMENT 13. Oxygen from Sodium Peroxid 
 by Action of Water. Fit a dry flask (200 to 300^-) 
 with a delivery tube and stopcock fun- 
 nel 14 . Place about 20^- ( 7 cm - circle) of 
 sodium peroxid in the flask and allow 
 water to drop slowly upon it from the 
 funnel. Collect five receivers full by 
 water displacement 13 and pass to Ex- 
 periment 14. 
 
 NOTE 14. Gas Generators. Gas gener- 
 ators are employed when a gas may be formed by the interaction 
 of a solid and a liquid. Of these there are many styles, of which 
 those provided with a stopcock funnel are the best, but stopcock 
 funnels are expensive. A serviceable stopcock funnel may be 
 made by the student as follows : Choose a piece of rubber tubing 
 that will just slip into the stem of a funnel and cut off a piece 
 about -2cm. long (Fig. 19). Cut a hole about i mm - in diameter 
 near one end and, warming the rubber a little, rub cement (made 
 by melting in a dish two parts of beeswax with one of rosin) 
 around trie lower half so as to form a thin coating. Very 
 cautiously (remember that funnels are made of thick glass and are 
 very liable to break if heated rapidly or unevenly) warm the stem 
 of the funnel where it commences to flare out and push the rubber 
 tube into it. When the glass is cold the cement 
 will hold the rubber in position very firmly. Put 
 a little vaseline on a glass rod 15 that slips easily 
 but snugly into the rubber tubs. To close the 
 stopcock, push the rod down so that it may cover 
 the lateral hole. To open it, raise the rod more or 
 less so as to uncover more or less the hole. Such 
 a stopcock cannot of course be used with liquids 
 which have any action on rubber. Pick out a 
 good cork fitting the neck of the flask (or use a 
 rubber stopper), soften it, and perforate it with 
 two holes, through one of which the stem of the 
 funnel passes, and through the other one of the 
 L-tubes, forming a delivery tube (Fig. 18). 
 
 Another form of home-made stopcock funnel 
 is the following : A funnel tube is cut off short 
 and connected with a long piece of glass tubing 
 by means of a bit of rubber tubing which can be closed with a 
 pinchcock (Fig. 20). 
 
 Still another form consists of an ordinary thistle or funnel tube, 
 into the stem of which fits a bit of rubber tubing slipped over a 
 glass rod. By pushing the rubber tube into the stem of the funnel 
 and holding it there by the glass rod, the stopcock is closed. 
 
 Fig. 20 HOME- 
 MADE STOPCOCK 
 FUNNEL, NO. 2 
 
20 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 EXPERIMENT 14. Properties of Oxygen. The first 
 receiver of gas caught in the three preceding experi- 
 ments contains the air that was in the generator and is 
 to be rejected. 
 
 Attach a piece of charcoal to a wire, heat it in a 
 flame until it begins to glow, and then removing the 
 glass plate from one of the receivers, insert it into the 
 gas (Fig. 21), replacing the glass plate as far as possible. 
 The wire may be thrust through a card so that the 
 charcoal can be supported in the center of the receiver. 
 Place a little sulfur in a combustion spoon 16 , set it 
 on fire by directing a flame down upon it, and lower it 
 into the second receiver. 
 
 Put a little red phosphorus 
 in a combustion spoon, light it 
 thoroughly and thrust it into the 
 last receiver. Keep the receiver 
 covered so that the fumes cannot 
 escape into the room. 
 
 Attach a piece of picture cord 
 wire to a stiff wire, fray out its 
 end a little, heat it and dip it into 
 sulfur so that some may cling to 
 the wire. Set this on fire and at 
 once introduce into a jar full of 
 oxygen. To prevent the intensely 
 hot oxid of iron which is formed 
 from breaking the receiver, it 
 should be a quarter full of water, 
 or a layer of wet sand may first 
 be put into the vessel. The object of tipping the frayed 
 end of the cord with sulfur is to raise the temperature 
 of the iron to the kindling point so that it too will burn. 
 What do these experiments teach about combustion in 
 air and in oxygen ? 
 
 Fig. 21 BURNING A SUB- 
 STANCE IN OXYGEN 
 
Experiments 
 
 21 
 
 a b c d 
 
 Fig. 22 COMBUSTION SPOONS 
 
 NOTE 15. Stirring Rods. To make a glass stirring rod, cut 
 off a piece of solid glass rod of the desired length and round its 
 ends by holding it in the flame of a Bunsen burner. Stirring rods 
 may also be made out of tubing by 
 heating its ends until the glass runs 
 together and closes them up. 
 
 NOTE 16. Combustion Spoons. 
 Combustion or deflagrating spoons are 
 little cups to hold combustible materials 
 to be burned in a receiver of gas. 
 Besides those procurable at the dealer 
 in chemical apparatus (Fig. 22 a), ser- 
 viceable ones may be improvised by (i) 
 fastening an iron or aluminum thimble 
 about half full of plaster of Paris (which 
 has been mixed with water and allowed 
 to set) to a wire handle (Fig. 22 6) ; (2) 
 hollowing out a piece of chalk and fastening it to a wire handle 
 (Fig. 22 c) ; and (3) twisting a wire around a bit of asbestos paper 
 (Fig. 22 d\ 
 
 OZONE 
 
 EXPERIMENT 15. Preparation of Ozone. Put a 
 
 few drops of ether in a small flask and cork it tightly. 
 The ether will vaporize and a mixture of air and ether 
 vapor will presently fill up the flask. Heat a stout 
 glass rod to redness, and plunge it into the mixture of 
 air and ether vapor. Smell of the product cautiously. 
 Hold a piece of iodo-starch paper over the mouth of 
 the flask and note any change of color. Does ether 
 vapor alone produce any change of color ? 
 
 CAUTION. Ether is very inflammable. Do 
 not have any flames near when pouring it from a 
 bottle. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 16. (Quantitative^ To Find the 
 Weight of One Liter of Oxygen. Put about 5^- 
 (i cm - circle) of powdered manganese dioxid in a clean, 
 dry evaporating dish and heat it as hot as possible for at 
 least fifteen minutes so as to dry it thoroughly. In the 
 meantime assemble an apparatus like that shown in 
 
22 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 Fig. 23. AB is a nine-inch test tube fitted with a two- 
 hole rubber stopper. Through one hole passes a short 
 bit of glass tubing over which a rubber hose provided 
 with a Hofmann cock or pinchcock is slipped ; through 
 the other passes an L-tube, the shorter branch of which 
 fits into the two-hole stopper of an aspirating bottle 17 . 
 The aspirating bottle, D, is filled full of water, and , 
 
 an " acid bottle, " about half full of 
 
 Fig. 23 APPARATUS FOR FINDING THE WEIGHT OF A LITER OF OXYGEN 
 
 temperature of the room. Take about 20^- (5 cm - 
 circle) of dry potassium chlorate and mix it on a piece 
 of smooth paper with the manganese dioxid, which 
 should still be warm. Transfer the mixture to the test 
 tube, which has been previously thoroughly dried, wipe 
 out any dust that may cling to the upper part of the 
 tube, and insert just below the stopper a loose plug of 
 glass wool or a coiled strip of previously ignited asbestos 
 paper, its object being to prevent the oxygen from car- 
 rying off any solid particles in passing from the tube. 
 
Experimen ts 23 
 
 Weigh the test tube and contents to a centigram as 
 soon as possible after rilling. 
 
 Holding the tube horizontally, tap it gently so as to 
 make the mixture spread out and lie along the tube, 
 and connect with the aspirating bottle, the tube being 
 supported on a ring of a retort stand. Opening the 
 clips at F and at H (use clip at //), force water into E 
 by blowing at F, so as to drive all air from the long 
 rubber tube. Then by suction draw water back into D 
 until its level reaches nearly to the stopper, raise E so 
 that the water in D and in E is at the same level, and 
 close F tightly. Close H and very cautiously remove 
 the rubber tube from E in such a manner that no water 
 escapes from the tube. Empty the water out of E and 
 drain it for a few seconds. Then place the end of the 
 rubber tube in E and open the clip at H. A little water 
 will flow out because the level in D is higher than that 
 in , but there should not be a continual flow, as that 
 would indicate that the apparatus was leaky. 
 
 With a small flame gently heat the test tube, begin- 
 ning near its mouth. If the mixture begins to froth at 
 the point heated, heat another portion of it. The flame 
 must not be held steadily at one place, but played to 
 and fro through a distance of about 3 cm -. The glass 
 should not be heated red-hot, as there is then danger of 
 a hole being blown through it. 
 
 When the "acid bottle" is about three-quarters full, 
 discontinue the heating and let the apparatus stand 
 until it cools to the temperature of the room. In the 
 meanwhile read the barometer. Then lift E up or 
 down (it can be lowered by bringing it down over the 
 side of the table), hold it so that the level of the water 
 remains the same for a minute or so in both bottles, 
 always keeping the end of the rubber tube under 
 water, and close the cock at H. 
 
Elementary Chemistry 
 
 Disconnect the test tube and weigh it again. The 
 difference between this weight and the one previously 
 found is the weight of the oxygen evolved. 
 
 Remove R without disturbing the water in the 
 rubber tube, and measure the volume of water it con- 
 tains by pouring it out into graduated vessels (Appen- 
 dix BY or by weighing it on a platform balance and 
 subsequently weighing the empty and drained bottle. 
 
 Take the temperature of the water and reduce the 
 volume of the oxygen to standard conditions. If this 
 reduced volume be denoted by v and if the weight of 
 the oxygen be denoted by zv, the weight of a liter may 
 be computed by means of the pro- 
 portion : 
 
 v : iv :: 1,000 : x 
 
 The accepted value for the 
 weight of a liter of oxygen is 1.43^-. 
 What possible sources of error can 
 you point out in the determination 
 of your value ? 
 
 NOTE 17. Aspirators. A large bottle, 
 Z>, is fitted with a two-hole stopper carry- 
 ing two L-tubes (Fig. 24). A rubber tube 
 a little longer than the bottle is slipped 
 over the outlet tube and may be closed 
 with a pinchcock, //. To aspirate a gas, 
 fill the bottle with water, insert the 
 stopper with its tubes, connect the inlet 
 tube with the apparatus furnishing the 
 gas, B ', remove the pinchcock, start the 
 water flowing so that as it goes out the gas 
 may be drawn into the bottle. Aspirating 
 bottles may also be used to store gases ; when the bottle is full of 
 a gas, slip a bit of rubber tubing over the inlet tube and close it 
 with a pinchcock, and then close the outlet tube. The gas may 
 be forced out by connecting the aspirator with a second one filled 
 with water and placed at a higher level. The water may be made 
 to siphon over from the second bottle into the first, thus expelling 
 the gas. The gas may also be driven out at B by connecting the 
 outlet tube with the water supply of the laboratory. 
 
 FlR. 24 ARRANGEMENT OF 
 
 TUBES IN AN ASPIRATING 
 BOTTLE 
 
Experiments 
 
 EXPERIMENT 17. (Quantitative^) To Find the Per- 
 centage of Oxygen in Potassium Chlorate. Clean 
 and dry a porcelain crucible and cover, place upon 
 a pipestem triangle 
 (Fig. 25), and heat 
 gently at first so as 
 not to break the cru- 
 cible, and then as hot 
 as possible for two or 
 three minutes. When 
 the crucible is cool, 
 weigh it to a centi- 
 gram (Appendix B}. 
 Put about 1.5^. (2. 
 circle) of dry pow- 
 dered potassium chlo- 
 rate in the crucible 
 and weigh again. 
 
 Place the covered 
 crucible on the tri- 
 angle and heat with a Fi 8- 25 HEATING IN A PORCELAIN CRUCIBLE 
 
 flame about 5 cm - high, which just reaches to the bottom 
 of the crucible. Lift the cover up from time to time 
 with the forceps and regulate the flame so that the 
 melted potassium chlorate is seen to give off its oxygen 
 but slowly. If any should spatter up on the cover, 
 remove the flame, place the cover bottom side upper- 
 most on a clean piece of smooth paper, and with a pin 
 loosen the layer of chlorate and return it to the cruci- 
 ble, being very careful that none is lost. When the 
 bubbling is seen to slacken, increase the size of the 
 flame, and finally heat for ten minutes with a flame 
 large enough to reach to the top of the crucible when 
 its yellow spot is just below the bottom of the crucible. 
 Let cool and weigh, 
 
26 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 Again heat very hot for about five minutes, and cool 
 and weigh as before. If the weight does not change, 
 pass to the calculations. If the weight is less, heat 
 again, and continue in this way until two successive 
 weights are the same. This operation is called heating 
 to constant weight. The loss of weight is equal to that 
 of the oxygen. The percentage of oxygen in the 
 chlorate is calculated thus: 
 
 Weight of potass, chlorate : weight of oxygen : : 100 : x 
 
 The accepted value for the percentage of oxygen in 
 potassium chlorate is 39.2. What is the percentage of 
 error in your result ? Point out any sources of error. 
 
 Fig. 26 GAS GENERATOR, PNEUMATIC TROUGH, AND RECEIVERS 
 
 HYDROGEN 
 
 EXPERIMENT 18. Hydrogen from Acids by Action 
 
 of Zinc. Arrange a gas generator as shown in Fig. 26. 
 A wide-mouthed bottle is fitted with a two-hole stopper 
 (best of rubber), through which pass a funnel tube 18 
 and an L-tube. A piece of rubber tubing connects the 
 L-tube with a second one, thus forming a delivery tube. 
 
Experiments 
 
 27 
 
 Cover the bottom of the bottle with granulated zinc, fit 
 in the stopper, push the funnel tube down so that it 
 nearly touches the bottom of the bottle, and run in 
 through the funnel tube enough water to just cover, and 
 thus seal its end. Pour dilute sulfuric or concentrated 
 hydrochloric acid 19 through the funnel so as to cause a 
 brisk evolution of gas, and after testing its purity 20 , 
 collect four receivers full by water displacement and 
 pass to Experiment 19. 
 
 As an alternate apparatus a stopcock funnel gener- 
 ator (Fig. 1 8) may be used. Zinc is placed in the bot- 
 tle, covered with water, and strong hydrochloric acid 
 dropped in just fast enough to make the gas come off 
 briskly. 
 
 NOTE 18. Funnel Tubes. Funnel tubes are tubes of glass 
 with one end flared out to form a funnel, or they may be described 
 as small funnels with long stems. The style shown in Fig. 26 is 
 sometimes called a " thistle tube," from its fancied resemblance to 
 the head of a thistle A funnel tube should always have its lower 
 end dip below the liquid in a generator so as to seal it. 
 
 NOTE 19. To Moderate Action of an Acid. If hydrochloric 
 acid is used and so much is introduced into the generator that 
 hydrogen is given off too rapidly, 
 a little water poured through the 
 funnel will dilute the acid and thus 
 moderate its action. 
 
 CAUTION. Hydrogen mixed 
 with air is very explosive. 
 
 NOTE 20. Testing Hydrogen. 
 Never perform experiments with 
 hydrogen until you have convinced 
 yourself that the hydrogen is free 
 from air in the following way : Fill 
 a small test tube with the gas 
 by water displacement. Place the 
 thumb over the mouth of the test 
 tube while it is still under water 
 and, bringing it close to a flame, 
 open it so that the gas may pass 
 into the flame (Fig 27). If the gas 
 ignites with an almost inaudible report, it is pure ; if with a loud 
 report, or sharp whistle, it is mixed with air. Continue to gener- 
 ate the gas until it is pure before collecting it. 
 
 Fig. 27 DISCHARGING GAS FROM 
 
 A TEST TUBE INTO A FLAME 
 
28 
 
 Elementary CJieviistry 
 
 EXPERIMENT 19. Properties of Hydrogen. Hold- 
 ing a receiver full of hydrogen in an inverted position 
 (Fig. 28), thrust a lighted splinter up into the gas and 
 then very slowly remove it. Does hydrogen burn ? If 
 so, what is the appearance of its flame ? Set a receiver 
 full of hydrogen, with its mouth upward, on the table, 
 and after waiting at least three minutes, insert a blaz- 
 ing splinter. How do you account for the result ? What 
 
 property of hydrogen 
 is hereby shown? See 
 if you can pour hydro- 
 gen upward. How 
 can you make sure 
 that hydrogen is in 
 the upper receiver? 
 Pressing a glass 
 plate or a piece of 
 cardboard tightly 
 against the mouth of 
 a receiver full of hy- 
 drogen, place it in- 
 verted upon a receiver 
 of the same size filled 
 with air, and slip out 
 the plate or card (Fig. 
 14). After at least five 
 minutes remove the 
 
 UDDCT rCCeiVCT and 
 
 . 
 
 keeping it inverted, 
 insert a lighted splinter (Fig 28). Account for the result. 
 What general property of gases is hereby illustrated ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 20. Transpiration of Hydrogen. 
 Hold down over the delivery tube (a straight tube is 
 substituted for the L-tube) of a gas generator, from 
 which hydrogen is issuing rapidly, a dry glass tube, 
 
 Fig. 28 - INTRODUCING A LIGHTED SPLINTER 
 OF WOOD INTO A GAS LIGHTER THAN AIR 
 
Experiments 
 
 29 
 
 closed at one end with a plug of plaster of Paris, with the 
 
 thumb pressed over the plug-. In a few minutes slowly 
 
 lift the tube up, keeping it closed 
 
 with the thumb all the while, until 
 
 it is clear of the delivery tube ; 
 
 then dip the open end under water 
 
 in a beaker or tumbler and remove 
 
 the thumb (Fig. 29). Let the tube 
 
 stand for at least fifteen minutes, 
 
 examining it from time to time. 
 
 Explain what occurs. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 21. Combustion 
 of Hydrogen. Wrap several 
 folds of a towel over and around 
 your gas generator so that in case 
 of an explosion the broken glass 
 can be prevented from flying 
 about. Test the purity of the 
 hydrogen 20 , which should be escaping quite rapidly, 
 and then attach a straight glass tube drawn out to a 
 jet 21 to the rubber tube. Ignite the hydrogen and 
 thrust the jet up into an inverted beaker. What col- 
 lects in the beaker ? 
 
 Pinch the rubber tubing so as to extinguish the 
 flame, dry the inside of the beaker, and as before 
 thrust the jet with unlighted hydrogen escaping from 
 it into the inverted beaker. What occurs ? 
 
 NOTE 21. Jet Tubes. To 
 
 make a jet tube, select a piece 
 of glass tubing about i2- 
 long and ^mm. bore with a 
 rather thick wall. Heat the 
 middle in a Bunsen flame, 
 twirling it so as to heat it uni- 
 formly. When it begins to 
 soften, slowly draw it out as shown in Fig. 30. Cut it off at the 
 narrowest point, and fire-polish the wider ends of the two jet 
 tubes thus made. 
 
 Fig. 2Q APPARATUS FOR 
 
 SHOWING TRANSPIRATION OF 
 A GAS 
 
 Fig. 30 STAGES IN MAKING A JET TUBE 
 
3O Elementary Chemistry 
 
 EXPERIMENT 22. Oxidation and Reduction. Scrape 
 a few bits of copper foil or wire bright and clean and 
 put them into the middle of a glass tube about 30 cm - 
 long. Heat the tube gently just below the copper, sup- 
 porting it on a ring stand with interposed wire gauze, 
 and in a slanting position so that a draft of air may pass 
 through it. Do not heat the glass to redness. The 
 blackening of the copper is due to the formation of 
 copper oxid ; the copper is oxidized. 
 
 Fig- 31 PASSING A GAS OVER A SUBSTANCE HEATED IN A TUBE 
 
 Let the tube cool and then slipping over one end of 
 it a delivery tube, and connecting the other end with a 
 hydrogen generator, pass hydrogen through it (Fig. 31). 
 After the hydrogen has been found by test to be pure, 
 heat the copper. What does the change of color go to 
 show ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 23. Hydrogen from Water by Action 
 of Sodium. With dry fingers and knife cut off a piece 
 of sodium not more than 5 mm - in diameter 22 and scrape 
 it bright and clean. Wrap the bit of sodium up snugly 
 in a scrap of filter paper which has been moistened in 
 kerosene 22 , and using tongs bring it under a large test 
 tube filled with water and inverted in a pneumatic 
 
Experiments 
 
 trough. Let go of the sodium so that it may rise into 
 the tube. If not enough gas is generated to fill the test 
 tube, use a second piece of sodium. Lift up the tube, 
 keeping its mouth 
 down, and bring it to 
 a flame. How do you 
 know it contains hy- 
 drogen ? 
 
 NOTE 22. Sodium 
 Must be Kept Dry. Be 
 
 sure that everything that 
 is used in handling so- 
 dium is dry. The object 
 of dipping the paper in 
 kerosene is to prevent a 
 too rapid access of the 
 water to the metal. Too 
 much paper should not be 
 used, else the water will 
 be prevented from com- 
 ing in contact with the 
 sodium. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 24. 
 Hydrogen from 
 Steam by Action of 
 Magnesium. Draw 
 out one end of an 
 L-tube so as to form 
 a jet 21 and thrust the 
 other end through a 
 
 Cork fitting a Small Fig. 32 HYDROGEN FROM STEAM BY THE 
 
 flask (Fig. 32). Put a 
 
 little (only a pinch, for if too much is used the heat of 
 the reaction may be so great as to break the tube) 
 powdered magnesium in the tube and shake it down so 
 that it lies along the branch next to the jet. Put a little 
 water in the flask, insert the cork, and heat the water 
 to boiling so that a moderate current of steam passes 
 
Elementary Chemistry 
 
 Fig. 33 HYDROGEN FROM STEAM BY THE ACTION OP IRON 
 
 through the jet. Apply a flame to the issuing- steam 
 and see if it can be ignited. The little flashes of light 
 are due to the burning of tiny particles of magnesium, 
 which are caught up and carried along by the steam. 
 
 With a second Bunsen flame heat all the horizontal 
 branch of the L-tube hot enough to prevent the conden- 
 sation of moisture in it. Then heat steadily the portion 
 of the magnesium farthest from the jet until a reaction 
 begins, and at once remove the flame. Can the gas now 
 issuing from the flame be set on fire ? Compare with 
 Experiment 21. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 25. Hydrogen from Steam by Action 
 of Iron. Place enough small brads in a piece of gas- 
 pipe (or, better, bicycle tubing) 40 cm - to 50^- long and 
 about 2 cm. bore, to fill the middle of the pipe for a 
 distance of about 20 cm - f and then fasten the pipe with 
 wire across a wide ring of a stand (Fig. 33). Attach a 
 
Experiments 
 
 33 
 
 delivery tube to one end of the pipe and to the other an 
 L-tube, with a long pieee of rubber tubing, making 
 connections with a second L-tube inserted in a flask 
 supported on a second ring above the pipe. Bend a 
 thick piece of asbestos board into a gable-roof shape 
 and place it over the pipe. Put a little water in the 
 flask and arrange the ring supporting it so that it nearly 
 touches the asbestos. Heat the middle of the gaspipe 
 as hot as possible, using two burners. Place bits of 
 wet filter paper over the ends of the pipe and keep 
 them dripping wet all the time so as to prevent the 
 charring of the corks. If the water in the flask boils 
 too vigorously, raise the ring supporting it a little. 
 Collect some of the gas given off and test it. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 26. Hydrogen from Solutions of 
 Caustic Alkalis by Action of Aluminum. Place a 
 few bits of aluminum in a test tube and fill it about a 
 fourth full with caustic soda or potash solution. If effer- 
 vescence is not very brisk, heat a little. Close the tube 
 with the thumb, and after a minute or so open it so as to 
 discharge the gas 
 into a flame (Fig. 
 27). Account for 
 what occurs. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 
 27. Hydrogen 
 from Sodium 
 Hydroxid by 
 Heating with 
 Iron Powder. 
 Make an intimate 
 mixture in a mor- 
 tar of i g- (6 mm -) of sodium hydroxid and 20^- (4^- circle) 
 of iron powder, and introduce it into a hard glass test 
 tube provided with a cork and delivery tube (Fig. 34). 
 
 Fig. 34 HEATING A SUBSTANCE IN A TEST TUBE 
 
 AND COLLECTING THE GAS EVOLVED 
 
34 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 Fig. 35 A COMMON 
 
 FORM OF WATER BATH 
 
 Supporting" the tube on wire gauze and under a ring, 
 heat the upper part of the mixture first so as not to 
 cause too brisk an evolution of the gas, 
 and collect it by water displacement. 
 EXPERIMENT 28. Hydrogen from 
 Calcium Hydroxid (Lime) by Ac- 
 tion of Iron Powder or Zinc Dust. 
 Make an intimate mixture of equal 
 volumes (2 cm - circle) of dry calcium 
 hydroxid and iron powder, put it into a hard glass test 
 tube provided with a cork and delivery tube, and heat, 
 using a test tube holder, collecting the hydrogen 
 evolved over water. Zinc dust may be used instead of 
 
 iron powder in Experi- 
 ments 27 and 28. 
 
 WATER 
 
 EXPERIMENT 29. Dis- 
 solved Matter in Differ- 
 ent Waters. Slip a small 
 rubber band over a test 
 tube about a third of the 
 way from its closed end, 
 fill it up to the band with 
 distilled water, pour the 
 water thus measured into 
 a clean evaporating dish 
 (watch glass or saucer), 
 and evaporate to dryness 
 on a water bath 2 3 or sand 
 bath (asbestos board) 12 . 
 Note the nature and 
 
 Fig. 36 AN IMPROVISED WATER BATH 
 
 amount of any residue. Repeat these operations with 
 hydrant water and other natural waters which may be 
 available. Compare natures and amounts of residues. 
 
Experiments 
 
 35 
 
 NOTE 23. Water Baths. To avoid raising the temperature 
 of a substance above that of boiling water, water baths are used. 
 A common form (Fig. 35) consists of a copper vessel with a cover 
 made of a series of rings. By removing one or more of these, a 
 dish may be set down nearly to its rim on the bath. Water is kept 
 gently boiling in the bath so that the dish may be surrounded by 
 steam. Care must be taken to replace from time to time the 
 water which boils away, else the temperature will be raised too 
 high. A serviceable water bath may be improvised with a beaker 
 (best with a lip) and stand (Fig. 36). 
 
 EXPERIMENT 30. Distillation. Fit one end of a 
 long straight tube to a retort or to an L-tube inserted 
 through the neck of a flask. The other end passes into 
 
 a test tube set in a dish of 
 water. Fill the flask (Fig. 
 37) or the retort (Fig. 38) 
 about a third full of water 
 and add a piece of copper 
 sulfate (3 >>.). Boil the 
 water in the flask gently 
 and collect a test tube full 
 of the distillate. It is well 
 to cover the part of the test 
 tube which is not under water with a piece of filter 
 paper which is kept wet so as to aid in the condensa- 
 tion. What is the color of 
 the distillate ? Can copper 
 sulfate be totally separated 
 from water by distillation ? 
 
 Fig- 37 SIMPLE DISTILLING APPARA 
 TUS, FLASK FORM 
 
 Fill an evaporating dish 
 about a fourth full of alco- 
 hol and set fire to it. While 
 the alcohol is burning, add Fig 38 _ 
 water in small portions at 
 a time with constant stirring until the flame goes out. 
 Clean out the retort or flask, and empty the mixture of 
 alcohol and water into it. Distill the mixture, collecting 
 
 SIMPLE DISTILLING APPARA- 
 TUS, RETORT FORM 
 
36 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 enough of the distillate to fill the test tube about a 
 fourth full. Pour the distillate into the evaporating 
 dish and try to set it afire. What does your result prove 
 about the possibility of separating alcohol and water by 
 distillation ? Which is the more volatile, water or alco- 
 hol ? Which has the higher boiling point ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 31. Coagulation Filters. Put a pinch 
 of clay in a test tube and fill with water. Shake the 
 water and clay well together and filter (Fig. 10) a por- 
 tion of the muddy water (a suspension of clay in water). 
 Is the filtrate clear? Filter the filtrate a second time 
 and see if it becomes clear. Can clay and water be 
 separated by filtration ? Now add to the muddy water 
 a few drops of alum solution, shake up thoroughly, and 
 filter through a fresh filter. Is the filtrate clear? If 
 not, add a little more alum and filter again. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 32. Conditions Affecting Solution. 
 (a) fineness of Division. Choose two crystals of po- 
 tassium dichromate, alum or copper sulfate, both just 
 small enough to slip into a test tube, and powder one 
 finely in a mortar. Put the crystal and the powder in 
 separate test tubes and fill both the tubes about half 
 full of water. Close the tubes with the thumbs and 
 shake vigorously. In which case does solution take 
 place the more rapidly ? In which case is the surface 
 of contact between the solid and the liquid the larger ? 
 To save time in dissolving a solid, what preliminary 
 operation ought it to be subjected to ? 
 
 (b) Temperature. Put about 6 - (3 cm - circle) of 
 powdered potassium dichromate in a test tube, and fill 
 it about a third full of water. Shake the solid and 
 liquid well together for some time. Does the solid all 
 dissolve? Is there a limit to the solubility of a sub- 
 stance at a given temperature ? Heat to boiling for a 
 minute or so. Does the solid all dissolve now ? Cool 
 
Experiments 37 
 
 the tube and contents by letting cold water run over it. 
 What happens ? What effect has temperature upon the 
 solubility of a substance ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 33. (Quantitative^) To Determine 
 the Solubility of Potassium Dichromate in Water. 
 Fill a flask (200 to 300 c - c -) a fourth full of powdered 
 potassium dichromate, and add sufficient water to fill 
 the flask about three-fourths full. Cork the flask tightly 
 and place it in a pneumatic trough filled with water at 
 the temperature of the room. Put a thermometer in the 
 trough and read its temperature at intervals of about 
 two minutes, and each time shake well the solid and 
 liquid in the flask. The temperature should not vary by 
 more than a degree for at least fifteen minutes. Filter 
 a portion of the solution thus saturated into a weighed 
 evaporating dish so as to fill it about half full. Weigh 
 the evaporating dish and solution and then evaporate 
 to dryness on a water bath 23 . Be very careful not to 
 lose any of the solid by spurting. Let the dish and con- 
 tents cool and again weigh. Calculate the percentage 
 composition of the solution. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 34. (Quantitative.} To Determine the 
 Solubility of Air in Water. Shake a large bottle filled 
 about half full of water vigorously for several minutes so 
 as to saturate it thoroughly with air. The water should 
 be at the temperature of the room, and care should be 
 taken not to warm it up in shaking by the heat of the 
 hands. Fit a small flask (200 to 300 c - c -} with a stopper 
 (best of rubber) and a delivery tube of narrow bore (not 
 more than 2 mm -) of the form shown in Fig. 39. Set the 
 flask on a ring of a stand with interposed wire gauze so 
 that its delivery tube may come under a test tube placed 
 in a beaker set on a second ring of the same stand. Fill 
 both the beaker and the test tube with water, invert the 
 filled test tube in the beaker, and pour out as much 
 
Elementary Chemistry 
 
 water as possible from the beaker without the water in 
 the test tube escaping. Take the temperature of the 
 water in the bottle and fill the flask brimful. Then 
 
 insert the stopper so 
 that the delivery tube 
 will be filled with 
 water also. There 
 must not be any bub- 
 bles of air either in the 
 flask or the delivery 
 tube. 
 
 Weigh the flask, 
 delivery tube, and con- 
 tents to decigrams, set 
 the flask upon the wire 
 gauze so that its deliv- 
 ery tube engages un- 
 der the test tube, and 
 heat with a small 
 flame, making the 
 water boil vigorously 
 until a cracking sound 
 is heard, indicating 
 that all the air has 
 been expelled from 
 the water. Remove the delivery tube from the water 
 in the beaker and stop heating. Fill the beaker with 
 water at the temperature of the room, lift the test tube 
 up so that the level of the water inside and outside is 
 the same, and mark it with a small level rubber band 
 slipped over the test tube. Remove the test tube and 
 determine the volume of the air driven out of the water 
 either with a burette (Appendix B) or by weighing the 
 water which fills the tube up to the rubber band. Dry 
 flask and delivery tube and weigh. Record results thus: 
 
 Fig. 39 APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING THE 
 
 SOLUBILITY OF AIR IN WATER 
 
Experiments 
 
 39 
 
 Weight of water filling flask and delivery tube = A <?" 
 
 Volume of air expelled at and mm. of mercury B c.c. 
 Volume of air reduced to o and 760 mm. of mercury = C c.c. 
 No. of c.c. of air at o and 760 mm - dissolved by A c.c. of water. 
 No. of c.c. of air dissolved by 1,000 c.c. of \vaterat = DC.C. 
 Accepted value for solubility of air in water (Appendix C). 
 
 EXPERIMENT 35. Heat Effects of Solution. Have 
 
 ready at hand 5.0^- of the solids named in the table 
 below in the form of a fine, dry powder. Measure. 
 (Appendix B) io.o c - c - of water at the temperature of 
 the room into a test tube, insert a thermometer, stir, 
 and read the temperature. Add all at once the first of 
 the powders, stir well with the thermometer, holding 
 the test tube with a holder so as not to warm the solu- 
 tion with the hand, and record the highest temperature 
 attained. Repeat these operations with the other sol- 
 ids, cleaning out the test tube after each trial. 
 
 Add 5.0^- of alcohol to ic-.o^- of water and find the 
 temperature of the well-stirred mixture. Also add 
 5.0^- of strong sulfuric acid to io.o c - c - of water and take 
 the maximum temperature. Record results as follows : 
 
 HEAT EFFECTS OF SOLUTION 
 
 SUBSTANCES 
 
 Solvent 
 
 Temperature 
 
 Change of 
 Tem- 
 perature 
 
 Name 
 
 Amt. 
 
 Name 
 
 Amt. 
 
 Initial 
 
 Highest 
 
 or 
 Lowest 
 
 Maxi- 
 mum 
 
 Kind 
 
 Ammonium chlorid.. 
 Calcium chlorid 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ammonium nitrate . 
 Potassium nitrate 
 Copper sulfate (dehy- 
 drated) _ . 
 
 Sugar 
 
 Potassium carbonate. 
 Sodium carbonate 
 Alcohol 
 
 Sulfuric acid 
 
 
40 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 EXPERIMENT 36. Supersaturation. Fill a test tube 
 about a fourth full of sodium acetate (or sodium sul- 
 fate) crystals and add barely enough water to cover 
 them. Heat cautiously to boiling until a clear solution 
 results and boil vigorously for a minute or so. Set the 
 tube aside in a slanting position so that any dust may 
 fall on the sides of the tube and not reach the solution. 
 After the solution is cool drop into it a very small frag- 
 ment of a sodium acetate (sodium sulfate) crystal and 
 shake the tube. What happens ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 37. Water of Crystallization. Place 
 in separate clean and dry small test tubes a few small 
 crystals of potassium nitrate, copper sulfate, and cobalt 
 chlorid. Place the test tubes on the wire gauze and 
 place under them a frame made of iron wire fashioned 
 so that while their closed ends converge to a common 
 center, their mouths just project beyond the gauze and 
 are lower than their closed ends. Adjust the flame of 
 a Bunsen burner so that it keeps red hot a small circle 
 just below the closed ends of the test tubes, being care- 
 ful not to let the flame strike through the gauze. Note 
 carefully the appearance of moisture in the mouths of 
 the tubes. In which case is it the most abundant ? 
 What changes do the substances undergo ? Which of 
 them contain water of crystallization and which me- 
 chanically enclosed water ? When the water of crystal- 
 lization is expelled from a substance, the substance is 
 said to be dehydrated. 
 
 Using a dilute solution of cobalt chlorid instead of 
 ink, write on paper with a clean, new pen. Is the writ- 
 ing almost invisible ? Waft the paper over a flame so 
 as to \varm it. Do the characters now show and in what 
 color? Breathe upon the writing. What happens? 
 How do you explain the action of this kind of sympa- 
 thetic ink ? 
 
Experiments 41 
 
 EXPERIMENT 38. (Quantitative.} To Find the 
 Percentage of Water of Crystallization in Gypsum. 
 
 Clean and weigh to centigrams a porcelain crucible 
 and cover. Place in it enough gypsum in powder or 
 coarse fragments to fill it about a fourth full. Weigh, 
 place it upon a pipestem triangle (Fig. 25), and heat 
 with a small flame for about ten minutes. Let the 
 crucible cool and weigh it. Heat the crucible once more 
 for about five minutes, let cool and weigh. If it has 
 lost in weight, heat it still again, and so on to constant 
 weight. Calculate the percentage of water of crystalli- 
 zation contained in gypsum. 
 
 Instead of a crucible, test tubes or clay pipes may be 
 used. A test tube is weighed, filled about a sixth full 
 of gypsum, again weighed and heated (held in a test 
 tube holder in a slanting position) to constant weight. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 39. Deliquescence. Put a little solid 
 potassium hydroxid ($ mm -) in an evaporating dish or 
 watch glass, set it aside in a safe place, and examine it 
 after a few hours. Review Experiment 7. How do 
 you account for the change ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 40. Efflorescence. Choose a clear 
 crystal of sodium sulfate, place it upon a watch glass or 
 evaporating dish, set it aside in a safe place, and examine 
 it from time to time. (It is advisable to weigh the dish 
 and crystal so as to keep track of any change in weight.) 
 What change does the crystal undergo ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 41. Test for Water. Expel the water 
 of crystallization from a little copper sulfate by heating 
 it in an evaporating dish or a tin-box cover. Place a 
 little of the dehydrated substance on a watch glass and 
 add a drop of strong alcohol. Does the substance turn 
 blue ? Try carbon bisulfid, ether, kerosene, or any other 
 liquids not containing water which are available. 
 Finally try water. How is the result a test for water? 
 
42 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 EXPERIMENT 42. (Quantitative.) To Ascertain the 
 Volumetric Composition of Water. Choose two long 
 and narrow test tubes as nearly of the same size as 
 possible, and slip over them narrow rubber bands or 
 tie around them bits of cotton string to serve as 
 markers. Place one marker about one- third of the 
 length of one of the tubes from its open end, and the 
 other marker on the second test tube about one-fourth 
 of the length of the tube from the open end. Fill 
 both tubes with water and, holding them in a pneumatic 
 trough, let in air until the level of the water inside and 
 outside is at the markers. Have a hydrogen generator 
 conveniently at hand from which hydrogen is issuing at 
 the rate of about two bubbles a second. Thrust one of 
 the test tubes over the delivery tube, and the instant 
 it is filled with hydrogen remove it and set it aside in 
 the pneumatic trough with its end under water. Do 
 likewise with the other tube. These tubes contain 
 definite, measurable volumes of air and hydrogen. 
 
 Now a mixture of air and hydrogen which contains 
 the two gases in just the right proportions totally to 
 combine and form water, explodes, when ignited, with 
 a sharp, whistling sound ; otherwise, if the proportions 
 are not just right, the sound of the explosion is fuller 
 and louder. Close the two tubes with the thumbs 
 under water and, bringing them on either side of a 
 flame (Fig. 27), let their contents pass into the flame in 
 rapid succession and note the character of the sounds. 
 There will probably be an easily detectable difference. 
 
 Now push the marker of the test tube which con- 
 tained the greater volume of hydrogen down a little 
 (a couple of millimeters), and the other marker up 
 about the same distance, thus making the volumes 
 more nearly equal. Fill them with air and with hydro- 
 gen as before, and ignite their contents. Continue in 
 
Experiments 43 
 
 this way until you can detect but a slight difference, if 
 any, in the sound of the explosions, which should be 
 more like a whistle than a report. 
 
 Empty out the tubes and drain them. Ascertain the 
 volume up to the marker, either by running- in water 
 from a burette or by weighing. (Appendix B.) Fill 
 the tubes brimming full with measured amounts of 
 water, thus finding the volumes of the mixtures of air 
 and hydrogen, whence by subtraction the volume of the 
 hydrogen may be ascertained. As air contains very 
 nearly one-fifth of oxygen by volume, one-fifth of the 
 volume up to the marker will be the oxygen which has 
 combined with the hydrogen. Enter results thus : 
 
 First Second 
 
 test tube. test tube. 
 
 Volume of air = A' c.c. ~ A c.c. 
 
 Volume of oxygen ( of A) = B' c.c. B c.c. 
 
 Volume of hydrogen = C' c.c. C c.c. 
 
 (B-j-B')^- of oxygen combine with (C -f- C') c - c - 
 of hydrogen, whence i c - c - of oxygen combines with 
 (C + C')/( B + B')^- of hydrogen. The accepted ratio 
 is i : 2. What are the sources of error? 
 
 HYDROGEN DIOXID 
 
 EXPERIMENT 43. Hydrogen Dioxid by Action of 
 Sodium Peroxid on Water. Add a dozen or so drops 
 of strong sulfuric acid to about 50^- of cold water in a 
 beaker and stir well. Cool the solution as much as pos- 
 sible (if ice is available, put a few pieces in the solution) 
 and add in small portions with constant stirring about 2#- 
 ( i cm. circle) of sodium peroxid. Pass to Experiment 45. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 44. Hydrogen Dioxid by Action of 
 Sulfuric Acid on Barium Dioxid. Put about io#- 
 (4 cm. circle) of barium dioxid in a beaker, and moisten 
 it with a few drops of water. Add about 30 c - c - of cold, 
 
44 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 dilute (about 10 per cent) sulfuric acid, stir well for sev- 
 eral minutes, let the solid settle, and decant the solution 
 of hydrogen dioxid from the insoluble barium sulfate. 
 If the filtrate is not clear, pour it upon the same filter 
 paper and continue in this way until it is perfectly clear. 
 Pass to Experiment 45. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 45. Properties of Hydrogen Dioxid. 
 Action of Potassium Permanganate Solution. Fill a test 
 tube about a fourth full of the hydrogen dioxid solution 
 prepared in Experiments 43 or 44, add a drop or so of 
 potassium permanganate solution and shake well. The 
 gas evolved is oxygen. Continue adding the perman- 
 ganate until the color is not discharged. 
 
 Action on lodo-Starcli Paper. Moisten iodo-starch 
 paper with a solution of hydrogen dioxid. What effect? 
 Where else has this paper been used ? W'hat two sub- 
 stances is it a test for ? How may they be distinguished 
 from each other ? 
 
 Action on Potassium DicJiromate Solution. Fill a 
 large test tube nearly full of water and add just enough 
 potassium dichromate solution to tinge it a very light 
 yellow. Now add a couple of drops of sulfuric acid, 
 and then a dozen or so drops of hydrogen peroxid solu- 
 tion. Shake well and note what happens. Pour some 
 out into a dish and let it stand for a few minutes. Fill 
 a small test tube about a sixth full of hydrogen dioxid 
 solution and add enough ether to form a layer about 
 half a centimeter thick. 
 
 CAUTION. Do not have any flames near when 
 using ether. 
 
 On shaking, do the two liquids mix ? Add one drop 
 of potassium dichromate solution and shake gently. 
 Result ? If you are in doubt about the result add 
 another drop, but do not use too much potassium 
 dichromate solution. 
 
Experimen ts 45 
 
 EXPERIMENT 46. (Quantitative.} To Verify the 
 Law of Definite Proportions by Weight. Weigh 
 out exactly 2.00 of sodium carbonate (washing soda) 
 in a porcelain evaporating dish. Add concentrated 
 hydrochloric acid, a few drops at a time, being careful 
 to avoid any loss from the effervescence. When the 
 sodium carbonate is wholly dissolved, evaporate to dry- 
 ness (Fig. 9) and constant weight. The residue is com- 
 mon salt. 
 
 Repeat, using exactly 4.00 *" of sodium carbonate. 
 Calculate the ratio of the sodium carbonate to the salt 
 in both cases. How do they compare ? How is this a 
 proof of the law in question ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 47. ( Quantitative} To Verify the Law 
 of Definite Proportions by Volume, (a) Put about 
 25 c.c. of concentrated hydrochloric acid in a beaker and 
 mix with it about an equal volume of water. Fill a 
 burette (Appendix B) with this mixture. Also fill a 
 second burette with concentrated ammonium hydroxid. 
 
 (b) Run 5.0 c - c - of the acid into a weighed evap- 
 orating dish and add a couple of drops of litmus 
 solution. After reading the burette containing the 
 ammonium hydroxid, run the ammonium hydroxid 
 into the acid slowly with constant stirring until the red 
 color just changes to blue. 
 
 The acid and ammonium hydroxid combine to form 
 a solid ammonium chlorid. Evaporate to constant 
 weight on a water bath. 
 
 (c) Put the same volume of acid into a second 
 weighed evaporating dish and add twice as much ammo- 
 nium hydroxid as before. Evaporate to constant weight 
 on a water bath. 
 
 (d) Run i o.o c - c - of the acid into a third weighed dish 
 and cautiously add just enough ammonium hydroxid to 
 change the color. Evaporate to constant weight. 
 
46 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 (e) Put a few drops of hydrochloric acid in a dish 
 and evaporate to dryness. Is there any residue ? Does 
 ammonium hydroxid leave a residue when evaporated ? 
 
 Try it with a few 
 drops. 
 
 (f) Compare the 
 weights of ammo- 
 nium chlorid obtained 
 in (/;), (c), (d). How 
 do your results verify 
 the law under discus- 
 sion ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 48. 
 (Quantitative.) To 
 Verify the Law of 
 
 Multiple Propor- 
 tions. Arrange an 
 apparatus as shown in 
 Fig. 40. The cylinder should be of at least 500 c - c - capac- 
 ity. Weigh out exactly 2.00^- and also 4.00 & of baking 
 soda (Appendix B). Put the larger amount in an evap- 
 orating dish and heat as hot as possible for at least ten 
 minutes. While the heating is going on, put the smaller 
 portion into the generator and pour IQC-C. O f hydrochloric 
 acid into the stopcock funnel. Fill the cylinder with 
 water and invert it in the pneumatic trough. Run the 
 acid into the generator and collect the carbonic acid gas 
 given off. Be careful not to let any of the gas escape 
 through the stopcock. When no more gas is evolved, 
 remove and clean the generator thoroughly. Mark the 
 level of the water inside the cylinder with a rubber band. 
 Now put the portion which has been heated into 
 the generator ; fill the cylinder afresh with water, and 
 collect the gas given off when 10 c - c - of hydrochloric acid 
 are run in upon the soda. 
 
 Fig. 40 STOPCOCK FUNNEL GAS GENERATOR 
 
 AND CYLINDER USED IN ILLUSTRATING THE LAW 
 OF MULTIPLE PROPORTIONS 
 
Experiments 
 
 47 
 
 Are the volumes of gas in the two cases approxi- 
 mately the same? Has the effect of the heating been 
 to expel half of the carbonic acid gas contained in the 
 baking soda? By heating, the baking soda has been 
 converted into washing soda. How much greater a 
 volume of carbonic acid does baking soda contain than 
 does washing soda? How do your results verify the 
 law in question ? 
 
 NITROGEN AND ITS HYDROGEN COMPOUNDS 
 
 EXPERIMENT 49. Separation of Nitrogen from 
 the Air. Bend the wire of a combustion spoon as 
 show r n in Fig. 41, and fill the cup with red phosphorus. 
 Ignite the phos- 
 phorus by direct- 
 ing a Bunsen flame 
 down upon it, and, 
 resting the bend 
 of the wire on the 
 bottom of the 
 pneumatic trough, 
 press a large, wide- 
 mouthed bottle 
 over it. 
 
 Note carefully 
 how the phos- 
 phorus burns. 
 What makes it 
 finally go out? 
 What becomes of 
 the white smoke 
 at first formed ? 
 What makes the water rise in the receiver? Let the 
 apparatus stand until the fumes have completely dis- 
 appeared. Then estimate the ratio of the volume of 
 
 Fig. 41 APPARATUS FOR REMOVING THE OXYGEN 
 
 FROM A CONFINED PORTION OF AIR 
 
48 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 the air taken to the volume of the gas left. Close the 
 receiver with a glass plate and set it upright upon the 
 table. Move the plate just far enough to one side to 
 permit the entrance of a blazing splinter of wood. 
 Does it continue to burn ? Is nitrogen combustible ? 
 Is it a supporter of combustion ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 50. Nitrogen by the Decomposition 
 of Ammonium Nitrite. 24 Mix in a mortar about 10^- 
 (6 cm - circle) of ammonium chlorid with about i$ff- of 
 sodium nitrite and place the mixture in a flask provided 
 with a perforated stopper and delivery tube (Fig. 16). 
 Just cover the mixture with water and heat gently 
 with interposed wire gauze until the reaction begins ; 
 then remove the flame. Collect two receivers full by 
 water displacement. If the liquid effervesces too much, 
 cool it by pouring water over the flask. Reject the 
 first bottle full, as it contains the air which was in the 
 apparatus. Remove the second receiver after closing it 
 with a glass slip and, holding it upside down (Why ?), 
 thrust a lighted splinter up into the gas. Is nitrogen a 
 supporter of combustion ? Does it burn ? 
 
 NOTE 24. Ammonium Nitrite Does Not Keep Well. Hence 
 it is made in this experiment by the reaction between ammonium 
 chlorid and sodium nitrite. The heat caused by the reaction is 
 usually sufficient to decompose the ammonium nitrite into water 
 and nitrogen as soon as it is formed. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 51. Nitrogen from Potassium Ni- 
 trate by Action of Iron Powder. Mix well io^- ($cm. 
 circle) of iron powder with 0.5 & (2 cm - circle) of pow- 
 dered potassium nitrate, put the mixture in a hard glass 
 test tube, fitted with a cork and delivery tube (Fig. 34), 
 and apply heat. Be careful to heat very gradually, as 
 the reaction may become rather violent. Collect sam- 
 ples of the gas by water displacement, and test them 
 with a blazing splinter. 
 
Experiments 49 
 
 EXPERIMENT 52. Ammonia from Ammonium Salts 
 by Action of Caustic Alkalis or Lime. Cover a pinch 
 of ammonium chlorid or nitrate in a test tube with po- 
 tassium or sodium hydroxid (caustic potash or soda) 
 solution. Heat gently to boiling and cautiously observe 
 odor by wafting the air above the mouth of the test 
 tube against the nostrils. Put a strip of moistened pink 
 litmus paper 25 across the mouth of the test tube and 
 note any change of color. 
 
 Put a little slaked lime 2 6 in the palm of one hand and 
 a little ammonium chlorid or nitrate in the other. Smell 
 of each substance. Then rub the substances together 
 between the palms and smell again. Also touch the 
 mixture with a strip of moist pink litmus paper 25 . 
 
 NOTE 25. Pink Litmus Paper. To make litmus paper of a 
 pink color, put a few drops of dilute hydrochloric acid in a watch 
 glass or on a piece of glass, and draw the strip of paper through 
 it. Wash out the excess of the acid by holding the paper in a 
 stream of water from the hydrant. The blue color may be restored 
 by using ammonium hydroxid instead of hydrochloric acid. As 
 litmus paper is usually sold with its color intermediate between 
 
 Eink and blue, it is a good practice to treat it as above so as to 
 ave it of a decided blue or pink color before making a test. 
 
 NOTE 26. Use Freshly Slaked Lime. The lime must be 
 freshly slaked. "Air-slaked " lime generally will not do. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 53. Ammonia from the Destructive 
 Distillation of Some Animal Substances. Heat some 
 such substance as gelatin, glue, hair, or feathers in a 
 test tube with a moistened strip of pink litmus paper 
 held across its mouth. What products, solid, liquid, 
 and gaseous, are formed ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 54. Preparation and Properties of 
 Ammonia. Arrange an apparatus as shown in Fig. 42. 
 Put about 25 # (ycm. circle) ammonium chlorid and 
 about three times its bulk of slaked lime 26 in the 
 flask, and add just enough water to make a pasty mass ; 
 or, fill the flask about a third full of strong ammonia 
 
elementary Chemistry 
 
 Fig. 42 APPARATUS FOR PREPARING AMMONIA 
 
 water (ammonium hydroxid). The rim of the funnel 
 should dip just below the surface of the water in the 
 dish. Heat very gently, and as soon as the gas evolved 
 is nearly all absorbed by the water, substitute for the 
 funnel a straight glass tube. Insert this delivery tube 
 into a narrow-mouthed bottle and collect the bottle full 
 of the gas by upward displacement 27 . 
 
 Keeping the receiver always upside down (Why?), 
 cork it tightly (or cover it with a greased glass plate) and 
 set it aside in an inverted position. Collect in like man- 
 ner a second bottle full of the gas. Dip a glass rod into 
 strong hydrochloric acid and bring the adherent drop 
 just above the jet of gas. What occurs ? Replace the fun- 
 nel and continue to absorb the gas as long as it can be 
 made to come off. The solution is ammonium hydroxid. 
 
 Hold the neck of the first receiver under water and 
 remove the cork. Does it seem to stick in the neck ? 
 If so, why ? What makes the water rush up into the 
 bottle ? Test the water in the bottle with pink litmus 
 
Experiments 5 1 
 
 paper 25 . Hold the second receiver upside down, re- 
 move the cork and insert a lighted splinter of wood. 
 Does ammonia support combustion ? Does it burn ? 
 
 To a little of the ammonium hydroxid add a few 
 drops of Nessler's reagent. Also test a little with solu- 
 tions of iron chlorid, ferrous sulfate, aluminum chlorid 
 or sulfate, and copper sulfate (at first very little, and 
 then an excess). Put a little ammonium hydroxid in a 
 small test tube and boil for a few seconds so as to fill 
 the tube with ammonia. Then rapidly invert it in a 
 beaker filled with very dilute copper sulfate solution. 
 What happens, especially in change of color ? 
 
 NOTE 27. Collecting a Gas by Upward Displacement. When 
 a gas is soluble in water it cannot of course be collected by water 
 displacement. If the gas is lighter than air, it can be collected by 
 delivering it into an inverted receiver ; the delivery tube should 
 be thrust as high up as possible, so that the lighter gas may push 
 the air down and out of the receiver. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 55. Ammonia by the Interaction of 
 Potassium Nitrate, Potassium Hydroxid, and Iron 
 Powder. Mix together 0.5^- (2 cm - circle) of potassium 
 nitrate, 0.3^- (6 mm - circle) of potassium hydroxid, and 25^- 
 (5 cm. circle) of iron powder, put the mixture in a hard 
 glass test tube and heat gently. How can you prove 
 that ammonia is given off ? What is the gaseous product 
 of heating a mixture of potassium nitrate and iron pow- 
 der (Experiment 51)? What of heating a mixture of 
 potassium hydroxid and aluminum powder (Experiment 
 26) ? Zinc or aluminum powder would also answer. 
 
 CARBON 
 
 EXPERIMENT 56. Formation of Charcoal. Place in 
 a small Hessian crucible or tin- box cover a thin layer 
 of sand and place upon it a small piece of soft wood 
 and of hard wood, a fragment of bone, and a lump of 
 starch. Cover them with a thick layer of sand and 
 
Elementary Chemistry 
 
 heat very hot for at least twenty minutes. Pour off the 
 sand and compare the products. What conclusions can 
 you draw as to the distribution of carbon ? What was 
 the purpose of imbedding the objects in sand ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 57. Graphite from Pig Iron. Put 
 about 3^- (2 cm - circle) of borings of foundry pig iron in a 
 
 beaker and add ioo c - c - 
 of dilute nitric acid 
 (made by mixing io c - c - 
 of the concentrated 
 acid with go c - c - of 
 water). Boil gently 
 (Fig. 43), replacing 
 from time to time 
 the water which has 
 boiled away, until the 
 residue does not seem 
 gritty when rubbed 
 with a glass rod. Fil- 
 ter and wash the resi- 
 due and let it dry. 
 Compare its proper- 
 ties with those of sam- 
 ples of graphite that 
 you can obtain from 
 different sources. 
 EXPERIMENT 58. Preparation of Lampblack. Put 
 a lump (2 mm,} of rosin in a spoon or tin-box cover and 
 set fire to it. Hold the rounded end of a test tube filled 
 with cold water in the flame. Examine the deposit on 
 the tube. Why was the tube filled with cold water? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 59. Density and Porosity of Char- 
 coal. Put a piece of charcoal in a test tube half full 
 of water. Does the charcoal seem lighter or heavier 
 than water ? Boil the water for several minutes. What 
 
 Fig. 43 BOILING A LIQUID IN A BEAKER 
 
Experiments 5 3 
 
 is observed on the surface of the charcoal ? Let the 
 water cool with the charcoal in it, and look at it from 
 time to time. What is your final conclusion as to the 
 density of charcoal ? Do not draw this conclusion until 
 the charcoal has been in the water for some time. 
 Account for its behavior before and after boiling. 
 
 With the aid of tongs hold a piece of charcoal in a 
 Bunsen flame until it is red hot, and then drop it into 
 water. Wait until it sinks. Explain its sinking. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 60. Adsorption of Gases by Char- 
 coal. Fill a large test tube half full of w r ater and add 
 to it, drop by drop, ammonium hydroxid, so as to give 
 it a faintly perceptible smell. You should just be able 
 to smell the ammonia when, after shaking up the liquid, 
 the mouth of the test tube is put under the nostrils. 
 Heat some finely powdered charcoal in an evaporating 
 dish nearly to redness, let it cool, and pour it into the 
 weak ammonia water. Shake well for a minute or so, 
 and then apply the tube to the nostrils. Has the smell 
 of ammonia been diminished ? What was the purpose 
 of heating the charcoal beforehand ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 61. Reduction by Charcoal. Put a 
 pinch of finely powdered charcoal in a small test tube, 
 a pinch of powdered copper oxid in a second test tube, 
 and a few bits of copper wire or granulated copper in 
 a third tube. Fill each tube about a fifth full of dilute 
 nitric acid and shake well. Note any action that may 
 take place, such as effervescence, colored fumes or liquid. 
 Place the test tubes side by side in a beaker about 
 half full of water, and heat the water until it is so hot 
 that you can hardly bear your hand in it. Note now 
 any changes or reactions in the test tubes. Are the 
 differences in the behavior of the three solids when 
 placed in nitric acid sufficient to characterize them ? 
 In other words, is this "nitric acid test" decisive? 
 
54 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 Mix well in a mortar 4^- ($ cm ' circle) of copper oxid 
 with 2ff- (4 cm - circle) of powdered charcoal. Place the 
 mixture in a test tube and heat as hot as possible with- 
 out melting the glass for at least five minutes. Does 
 the color of the mixture change ? If so, what substance 
 may it indicate the presence of ? Put a pinch of the 
 product in a small test tube and add nitric acid as above. 
 Is there any evidence that copper has been formed and 
 is present? What role does the charcoal play? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 62. Decolorizing Action of Bone- 
 black. Into a test tube nearly full of water put enough 
 molasses or litmus solution to tinge the water slightly. 
 Fit a funnel with a filter paper and nearly fill it with 
 boneblack. Pour the mixture prepared upon the bone- 
 black and catch the filtrate in a second test tube. If 
 the filtrate is not perfectly colorless, pour it upon the 
 boneblack again, and continue this until all the color is 
 removed from the mixture. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 63. Combustibility of Different 
 Forms of Carbon. Place a wire gauze on a ring of a 
 stand at such a height above a Bunsen flame that a 
 circle about 3 cm - in diameter is made red hot. Place in 
 this circle pieces "($ mm -) of graphite (from a "lead pen- 
 cil "), of charcoal, of gas carbon, of soft and of hard coal, 
 and heat until the charcoal changes into ash ; be care- 
 ful to have all the substances equally heated. Describe 
 fully the changes which each substance undergoes. 
 
 THE COMPOUNDS OF CARBON WITH OXYGEN 
 
 EXPERIMENT 64. Carbon Dioxid a Product of Com- 
 bustion. Drop a piece of burning paper into a dry, wide- 
 mouthed bottle and cover it with a glass slip. When the 
 paper ceases to burn, pour in some lime water and shake 
 the contents of the bottle vigorously. What happens 
 to the lime water ? 
 
Experiments 
 
 55 
 
 EXPERIMENT 65. Carbon Dioxid Given off in Res- 
 piration. Fill a large test tube a third full of lime water, 
 and by means of a glass tube make the breath bubble 
 through the solution a dozen or so times. What occurs ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 66. Carbon Dioxid Produced by 
 Fermentation. Dissolve a handful of brown sugar or 
 an equal bulk of molasses in about a liter of water con- 
 tained in a bottle or flask provided with a delivery 
 tube. Add a little yeast and set the apparatus in a 
 warm place (30 to 40). Collect the gas which soon 
 begins to form in test tubes and test it with lime water. 
 
 Fig. 44 GENERATING A GAS AND COLLECTING IT BY DOWNWARD DISPLACEMENT 
 
 EXPERIMENT 67. Carbon Dioxid from a Carbonate 
 by Action of an Acid. Place several lumps of marble 
 (calcium carbonate) in a gas generator and cover them 
 with water. Connect with a wash bottle a fourth full 
 of water (Fig. 44). Pour some strong hydrochloric acid 
 down the funnel so as to cause a brisk evolution of gas. 
 Collect the gas by placing the delivery tube at the 
 
56 Elementary C lie mist ry 
 
 bottom of a receiver. Carbon dioxid is heavier than 
 air and collects at the bottom of the receiver. This 
 method of collecting a gas is known as that of "down- 
 ward displacement." Collect five receivers full for use 
 in Experiment 68, and close them with glass slips. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 68. Properties of Carbon Dioxid. 
 Lower a lighted splinter of wood into a receiver of car- 
 bon dioxid. What happens ? Pour a little lime water 
 into another receiver of the gas and shake it up. What 
 happens ? Pour a receiver full of carbon dioxid as you 
 would a receiver of water into a second receiver con- 
 taining only air. Lower a lighted splinter into the 
 second receiver. What evidence is there that the gas 
 has been poured from the one receiver into the other ? 
 Empty just as if the carbon dioxid were water a receiver 
 full of carbon dioxid upon a candle flame. What hap- 
 pens ? Holding one end of a bit of magnesium ribbon 
 by means of tongs, ignite the other end thoroughly, 
 and plunge it into a large receiver full of the gas. 
 What are the black and the white particles formed ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 69. Action of Carbon Dioxid on 
 Litmus. Add a few drops of litmus solution to water 
 in a test tube and pass carbon dioxid into it for a few 
 minutes. What change of color ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 70. Carbon Dioxid Absorbed by 
 Sodium or Potassium Hydroxid Solutions. Pass 
 carbon dioxid into a solution of caustic potash or soda 
 (potassium or sodium hydroxid solution). When the 
 gas ceases to be absorbed, pour a little of the solution 
 into a test tube and add dilute hydrochloric acid. What 
 does the effervescence that ensues go to show ? Pour 
 the rest of the solution into a shallow dish and let it 
 stand until crystals appear. Place some of these crys- 
 tals in a test tube and add hydrochloric acid. What evi- 
 dence is there that the crystalline mass is a carbonate? 
 
Experiments 
 
 57 
 
 EXPERIMENT 71. Carbon Dioxid in Solution Dis- 
 solves Calcium Carbonate. Mix lime water with an 
 equal volume of water in a test tube and pass carbon 
 dioxid, purified by passing it through water in a wash 
 bottle (Fig. 44), through it for some time. Does the 
 white precipitate of calcium carbonate finally dissolve.? 
 Boil some of this clear solution so as to expel the car- 
 bon dioxid from solution. What happens ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 72. Carbon Monoxid by Action of 
 Sulfuric Acid on Sodium Formate. Fit a test tube 
 with a perforated cork through 
 which passes a short, straight 
 piece of glass tubing ending 
 in a jet (Fig. 45). Put enough 
 sodium formate in the tube 
 to fill it to the depth of about 
 a centimeter, and cover it to 
 a depth of about 4 cm - with 
 strong sulfuric acid. Hold- 
 ing the tube with a test tube 
 holder, warm it cautiously so 
 that the contents may not 
 froth over, and light the gas 
 given off. What is the appear- 
 ance of the flame just as soon 
 as the gas is lighted and be- 
 
 fore the glass tip has been Fig. 45- PREPARING CARBON MON- 
 
 heated red hot? Be very 
 
 careful not to let the poisonous gas escape into the 
 room, repeatedly applying a light to the jet tube so as 
 to burn the gas as soon as formed. 
 
 P^XPERIMENT 73. Carbon Monoxid by the Action of 
 Sulfuric Acid on Potassium Ferrocyanid. Put about 
 io-- (5 cm. circle) of potassium ferrocyanid in a flask (200 
 to 300 c-c-) provided with a delivery tube ending in a jet, 
 
Elementary Chemistry 
 
 and add about 50^- of strong sulfuric acid. Heat 
 gently (Fig. 46) and ignite the escaping gas ; note the 
 appearance of the flame and any other phenomena that 
 
 you may observe. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 74. Oxids of 
 Carbon from Oxalic Acid. 
 Into a flask (200 to 300 c - c -) 
 fitted with a delivery tube put 
 about 5^- (4- circle) of solid 
 oxalic acid and add about 
 40^- of strong sulfuric acid. 
 Heat cautiously and after the 
 air has all been Driven out of 
 the apparatus, collect by water 
 displacement a long, narrow 
 test tube full of the gas. Close 
 the tube with the thumb un- 
 der water and transfer it to a 
 beaker nearly full of a very 
 dilute solution of caustic soda 
 or potash. Let it stand until 
 the liquid ceases to rise in the tube. What is the decrease 
 in volume due to ? What is the ratio of the volume of 
 the two oxids of carbon obtained from oxalic acid ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 75. (Quantitative.) To Find the 
 Weight of a Liter of Carbon Dioxid. Fit a flask 
 (300 to 400 c - c -) with a one-hole rubber stopper through 
 which passes a glass tube a little longer than the flask, 
 over one end of which is slipped a bit of rubber tubing 
 (Fig. 47). Fill the flask brimming full of cold water, 
 and insert the stopper and tube; be careful to exclude 
 all air bubbles and to have the water reach to the end 
 of the rubber tip. Close the rubber tube as near to the 
 glass as possible with a pinchcock, and mark with a 
 pencil a line around the stopper even with the rim of 
 
 Fig. 46 PREPARING CARBON MON- 
 
 OXID FROM POTASSIUM FERROCY- 
 ANID 
 
Experiments 
 
 59 
 
 the flask's neck. Weigh to decigrams the flask thus 
 filled with water ; this weight in grams is equal to the 
 volume in cubic centimeters. 
 
 Empty out the water and dry the apparatus thor- 
 oughly. Multiply the volume by 0.001293 (the weight 
 of i c - c - of air at standard conditions) to get the weight 
 of air filling the flask at standard conditions. Open the 
 pinchcock and connect the rubber tubing with a cur- 
 rent of dry carbon dioxid. Loosen the stopper so that 
 the carbon dioxid delivered at the bottom of the flask 
 can drive out the air. After about five minutes insert 
 the stopper to the same extent as before, i. c., to the 
 pencil line, close the pinchcock, and disconnect from 
 the carbon dioxid generator. Open the pinchcock for 
 an instant so as to let the ex- 
 cess of carbon dioxid escape, 
 and weigh the apparatus to 
 centigrams. Read the ther- 
 mometer and the barometer. 
 
 Repeat the operation of 
 filling the flask with carbon 
 dioxid so as to make sure that 
 all the air has been expelled ; 
 this will be shown by no in- 
 crease in weight in the second 
 weighing. As soon as a con- 
 stant weight has been attained, 
 again read the thermometer 
 and barometer, using the last 
 readings for the calculations. 
 The difference of the weights 
 of the flask full of air and filled with carbon dioxid, plus 
 the calculated weight of the air, gives the weight of the 
 carbon dioxid. Reduce this volume to o and j6o mm -, 
 and then compute the weight of a liter of carbon dioxid. 
 
 Fig. 47 APPARATUS FOR FINDING 
 
 THE WEIGHT OF A LITER OF CARBON 
 
 DIOXID 
 
6o 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 SOME NITROGEN AND HYDROGEN COMPOUNDS 
 OF CARBON 
 
 EXPERIMENT 76. Methane from Sodium Acetate 
 by Action of Soda-lime. Pulverize about 10^- of fused 
 and dry sodium acetate and mix it thoroughly in a mortar 
 with an equal weight of fused and dry soda-lime. Heat 
 
 the mixture in a 
 flask ( 100 to 2oo c - c -) 
 provided with a 
 one-hole cork, de- 
 livery tube and a 
 safety bottle 28 
 (Fig. 48), and col- 
 lect a couple of 
 receivers full by 
 water displace- 
 ment. Ascertain 
 whether the gas is 
 combustible or a 
 supporter of com- 
 bustion. Pour a little lime water into one of the 
 receivers just after the methane has been ignited. The 
 result proves what element to be present in methane ? 
 How could you prove the presence of hydrogen in it ? 
 EXPERIMENT 77. Ethylene from Alcohol by Ac- 
 tion of Sulfuric Acid. Pour 10^- of water into a 
 flask (200 to 3oo c -< ; -), add slowly with constant stirring 
 30 c - c - of strong sulfuric acid, and cool the flask by hold- 
 ing it under cold water. Then add io c - c - of alcohol. Fit 
 a cork and delivery tube to the flask, interpose a safety 
 bottle 28 (Fig. 48), heat gently, and collect a couple of 
 receivers full of the gas by water displacement. Note 
 its odor. How does it burn ? Compare its flame with 
 those of the other combustible gases thus far studied. 
 
 Fig. 48 APPARATUS FOR GENERATING A GAS TO 
 
 COLLECTED BY WATER DISPLACEMENT 
 
Experiments 61 
 
 NOTE 28. Safety Bottle. The object of the safety bottle is to 
 prevent any water which may be drawn back through the delivery 
 tube from entering the hot flask and probably breaking it. The 
 entrance and exit tubes of a safety bottle should not project much 
 below the lower surface of the cork. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 78. Acetylene by Action of Water 
 on Calcium Carbid. Place a few small lumps of cal- 
 cium carbid in a gas generator, and cover them with 
 strong alcohol. Slowly add water through the funnel 
 tube so as to cause a brisk evolution of the gas. Catch 
 a couple of receivers full and ascertain its physical 
 properties. With what kind of a flame does it burn ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 79. Destructive Distillation. Fill a 
 test tube to a depth of about 3 cm - with excelsior or soft 
 coal, packing it in tight, and support the tube horizon- 
 tally between two rings of a retort stand (Fig. 34). Fit 
 in a cork and delivery tube, and heat the lower end of 
 the tube, gently at first, but finally as hot as possible 
 without melting the glass. Let the delivery tube dip 
 below the surface of the water in a pneumatic trough, 
 and from time to time catch a test tube full of the gas 
 given off, and test its inflammability. When no more 
 gas is evolved, remove the delivery tube from the 
 water. Test the liquid which has collected in the tube 
 near its mouth with blue litmus paper. What effect ? 
 What are the physical properties of the residue ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 80. A Simple Gas Factory. Roll a 
 piece of paper (foolscap size) so as to form a cone with 
 one end about 0.5 cm - in diameter and the other 2 to 3 cm - 
 in diameter. Hold it vertically with the narrow end 
 up and set fire to the other end. Apply a flame to the 
 upper end a little above the paper. Does the escaping 
 gas catch fire ? When the paper has burned about a 
 third of its length, quench the flame by dipping it under 
 water. Unroll the paper and examine any deposit on 
 that part of it which formed the lining of the cone. 
 
62 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 EXPERIMENT 81. A Candle as a Gas Factory. 
 
 Heat a small bit of a candle in an old test tube until 
 vapors are formed that, on escaping from the tube, 
 may be ignited. Blow out a candle flame and imme- 
 diately bring a burning match or 
 flame down towards the wick. 
 What evidence is there to show 
 that a gas is being given off ? 
 
 THE ATMOSPHERE 
 
 EXPERIMENT 2. (Quantitative^) 
 To Determine the Percentage 
 of Oxygen in the Air. Fill a 
 hydrometer jar nearly full of water 
 at the temperature of the room. 
 Pour a little water in a graduated 
 tube, place its open end in the 
 water in the hydrometer jar, and 
 let in air, if necessary, by raising it 
 up until it nearly fills the gradu- 
 ated portion. Lift the tube up 
 until the level of the water within 
 and without is the same and read 
 off the volume of the air. Note 
 the temperature of the water and 
 the reading of the barometer, and 
 reduce the volume read to stand- 
 ard conditions. Bend a copper wire 
 about twice as long as the graduated tube (Fig. 49) in a 
 V-shape, sharpen one end with a file, and stick on this 
 pointed end a piece of phosphorus which has just been 
 scraped clean under water. Immerse the phosphorus 
 on the end of the wire under the water in the jar, and 
 bring the tube down over it so that the phosphorus pro- 
 jects up into the air. What happens? 
 
 Fig. 49 DETERMINING THE 
 
 PERCENTAGE OF OXYGEN 
 
 IN THE AIR 
 
Experiments 63 
 
 Let the apparatus stand for at least twenty-four 
 hours, then lift the tube up until the level of the water 
 inside and out is the same and the phosphorus is under 
 water, and read off the volume. Reduce this volume to 
 standard conditions after reading the temperature and 
 pressure. Remove the phosphorus and again scrape it 
 clean under water and replace it in the tube as before, 
 leaving it there until the next day. Again find the vol- 
 ume of the gas, reduce it to standard conditions, and see 
 if it is the same as before. Compute the percentage of 
 oxygen in the sample of air taken. 
 
 O 1 234567 
 
 Fig. 50 TEST TUBE AND SCALE FOR DETERMINING THE VOLUME OF OXYGEN 
 
 IN A GIVEN VOLUME OF AIR 
 
 EXPERIMENT 83. The Volume of Oxygen in Air. 
 
 Select a long, narrow test tube and cut a piece of paper 
 whose length has the same ratio to that of the test tube 
 as the scale has to the test tube in the figure (Fig. 50). 
 Bend the ends of the strip of paper together and crease 
 it in the middle, and do this a second and a third time. 
 Then straighten the paper out so as to form a scale of 
 eight equal divisions to serve as a measure of the vol- 
 ume of the test tube. Instead of the above, any rule 
 or scale may be used. 
 
 Fill the test tube about one-eighth full of dry pyro- 
 gallic acid, and, holding the test tube so that the thumb 
 may be three-eighths of the distance from the bottom, 
 pour in potassium hydroxid solution up to the level of 
 the thumb. Immediately close the tube with the 
 thumb and shake the air and solution well together for 
 
64 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 several minutes. Open the test tube with the thumb 
 under water in a pneumatic trough (a beaker will do) 
 and let stand for a few minutes so that the air may 
 come to the temperature of the room. By means of 
 the scale measure the volume of the gas left in the 
 test tube, lifting it up so that the level of the water 
 inside and out may be the same. How many volumes 
 of air did you take ? How many volumes of gas have 
 you now? How many volumes of oxygen were ab- 
 sorbed ? What is the volumetric composition of air ? 
 EXPERIMENT 84. Action of Dust on the Precipita- 
 tion of Water Vapor. Fit a bottle (500 to 2,000 c - c -} 
 with a two-hole rubber stopper, through each of the 
 holes of which passes an L-tube which is connected 
 with a chlorid of calcium tube. To one of the calcium 
 chlorid tubes is attached a small bicycle pump or a 
 rubber bulb with a valve. Put enough water in the 
 bottle to fill it to a depth of about 2 cm -. Insert the stop- 
 pers tightly and, closing with the thumb one end of 
 the calcium chlorid tube not connected with the pump, 
 pump air in through the other. When the pressure has 
 become rather great, suddenly remove the thumb and 
 note what takes place in the bottle. Repeat several 
 times so as to make sure of the appearance of the phe- 
 nomenon. Fill the calcium chlorid tubes loosely with 
 cotton wool and pump in air as before. Do this a num- 
 ber of times so as to replace the air in the bottle with 
 air which has been freed from its dust particles by 
 filtration through cotton. Is there any change in the 
 phenomenon ? Let the bottle stand for several hours 
 and then pump filtered air into it. What happens ? 
 Let it stand for several hours longer and then do as 
 before. Now thrust a lighted match for an instant into 
 the neck of the bottle (after loosening the stopper) so 
 as to introduce some smoke, i. e., dust, into the bottle, 
 
Experiments 65 
 
 and pump in filtered air. What happens ? What con- 
 clusion can be drawn as to the action of dust particles 
 in the formation of water drops from vapor ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 85. (Quantitative^] To Find the 
 Weight of a Liter of Air. Melt off the top of one 
 tomato can and the bottom of another. Pierce a hole 
 about 3 mm - in diameter in the center of the bottom 
 melted off and solder over it a bicycle valve. 1 
 
 Solder this bottom on the can, the top of which was 
 removed. Connect with a bicycle pump, and pump in 
 air until the pump works very hard. Disconnect the 
 pump and weigh the can to centigrams. 
 
 Slip over the valve a piece of rubber tubing in which 
 has been placed a match with its head removed. Con- 
 nect the other end of the tubing with an aspirating 
 bottle, being sure to have the pressure in the bottle 
 equal to that of the atmosphere. Pinch the rubber 
 tubing around the match which should be resting in 
 the valve, and, pressing the match against the valve, 
 open it a little so as to let some of the air escape. Con- 
 tinue doing this until no more air escapes from the can. 
 As the air on expanding cools, wait a few minutes and 
 then open the valve again, having the vessel employed 
 to catch the water driven out of the aspirator at such a 
 height that the water levels are the same. Remove 
 the can and weigh it. The loss in weight represents 
 the weight of the volume of air which has escaped 
 from the can. 
 
 Measure the volume of this water expelled from the 
 aspirator either by weighing to decigrams or by means 
 of graduates. Reduce the volume to o and 760 mm -. 
 Calculate the weight of one liter of air. 
 
 J This valve must close perfectly air-tight even when the screw- 
 cap is not placed on it. 
 
66 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 FIRE AND FLAME 
 
 EXPERIMENT 86. Kindling Temperature. I. Put 
 
 a few drops of carbon bisulfid into a beaker and cover 
 it with a card or glass slip. The vapor of the liquid 
 then mixes with the air in the beaker. Heat the end 
 of a glass rod to redness and thrust it into the beaker. 
 Be careful to have your face as far as possible from the 
 beaker. Repeat, using alcohol instead of carbon bisul- 
 fid. What are your conclusions in regard to the tem- 
 peratures at which different C9mbustibles take fire ? 
 
 II. Try to ignite illuminating gas with a spark (not 
 a flame) at the end of a match stick. Is the tempera- 
 ture of the spark high enough ? Press a piece of wire 
 gauze, held horizontally, down upon a Bunsen flame. 
 Give reasons for what you observe. Pinch the rubber 
 tubing together to extinguish the flame, and then, hold- 
 ing the gauze just above the orifice, light the gas above 
 the gauze. Raise the gauze up and note the behavior 
 of the flame. If the gauze were made of a material 
 which is a poor conductor of heat, how do you think it 
 would modify the phenomena observed ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 87. Structure of Flame. I. A candle 
 flame. Examine a candle flame in a place free from 
 drafts, observing all its parts with their colors, and make 
 drawings of each part. Holding it before a blackboard 
 or other dark surface, note the outer portion. Also hold 
 it in direct sunlight and examine the shadow it casts on 
 white paper. Holding a piece of sized paper (asbestos 
 paper is better) horizontally with both hands, press it 
 down for a moment or so on the flame nearly to the wick, 
 and examine the charred or sooty portions of the paper. 
 
 II. A Bunsen flame. Repeat the above experiments 
 with a Bunsen flame instead of a candle flame. Hold a 
 match stick across the orifice of the burner and note how 
 
Experiments 67 
 
 the wood is charred. Hold it just above the inner cone 
 and note what happens. Draw out one end of a piece of 
 glass tubing to a bore of a little less than a millimeter, 
 thrust the wider end into the inner cone and ignite the 
 gas escaping from the drawn-out end. Slowly raise the 
 tube until its wider end comes above the inner cone and 
 note what happens. Thrust a pin through a match near 
 its head and put the stick into a burner. Turn on the 
 gas and light it above the match. Hold a piece of new 
 asbestos paper or board vertically so as to divide the 
 flame in halves and note how it is charred. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 88. Luminosity of Flame. Sprinkle 
 a little charcoal dust into a non-luminous flame ; also 
 rub two pieces of charcoal together near the airholes 
 of a Bunsen burner so that the dust may be carried up 
 into the flame by the inflow of the air. What is the 
 effect upon the flame ? Stir up the dust in the vicinity 
 of a non-luminous flame. Close up the airholes of a 
 Bunsen burner, and essay an explanation for the lumi- 
 nosity of the flame thus produced. Examine a Wels- 
 bach burner and mantle. Wherein does the Welsbach 
 burner resemble the Bunsen burner ? What is the 
 function of the mantle? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 89. Speed of Propagation of Flame. 
 Slowly turn off the gas of a Bunsen flame so as to 
 diminish its speed of outflow very gradually. What 
 happens ? This is because the speed of flow of the gas 
 becomes less than that of the flame. Now turn the gas 
 full on. At what two orifices is the flame now burning ? 
 What was the cause of the slight explosion ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 90. Oxidizing and Reducing Flames. 
 Cut out a little cavity in a piece of charcoal, pack it 
 nearly full of litharge (lead oxid), and direct the reduc- 
 ing flame of a blowpipe steadily upon it for some time. 
 Examine the lead obtained. Now place a bit of lead 
 
 6 
 
68 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 in a cavity in a piece of charcoal and direct the oxidiz- 
 ing flame upon it. Note the fumes and the color of 
 the coating on the charcoal. 
 
 SALTS, ACIDS, AND BASES 
 
 EXPERIMENT 91. General Properties of Acids. 
 
 Fill a beaker with distilled water, and after rinsing off 
 a glass rod, dip it into the distilled water and place the 
 drop that adheres to it on the tongue, noting its taste. 
 Rinse the rod again it must be washed after each test 
 and by means of it place a drop of the distilled water 
 on a piece of blue and of pink litmus paper, being sure 
 that the paper is on a clean surface. What change of 
 color ? 
 
 Pour about io c - c - of the distilled water into a clean 
 test tube, add not more than three drops of strong sul- 
 furic acid, and stir well together. In the same manner 
 as before taste this acid solution and ascertain its action 
 on pink and on blue litmus paper. 
 
 Perform similar tests with very dilute solutions of 
 any other acids which are available, as nitric, acetic, 
 hydrochloric, tartaric. 
 
 Review Experiment 18 and state what is the general 
 action of dilute acids on metals. Test the action of acids 
 on any other indicators which may be available, such as 
 Congo red, phenolphthalein, methyl orange. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 92. General Properties of Bases. 
 Dissolve a piece (3 mm -) of sodium hydroxid in about 
 IQC.C. of water in a test tube. Pour a drop or so on 
 your finger and rub it with another finger. What is 
 the feel? Dilute a little of this solution with about 
 twenty times its volume of water, and, using a stirring 
 rod, cautiously taste a drop. If the taste is not decided 
 enough, add a little more of the sodium hydroxid solu- 
 tion. Find what effect the solution has on pink and on 
 
Experiments 69 
 
 blue litmus paper as well as upon any other indicators 
 available. Repeat these tests with potassium hydroxid 
 instead of sodium hydrcxid ; also ammonium hydroxid 
 (review Experiment 54), and with lime water (calcium 
 hydroxid, Ca(OH) 2 , solution). 
 
 EXPERIMENT 93. Neutralization. Place about 5^- 
 of a very weak solution of sodium hydroxid in an evap- 
 orating dish, and add a little litmus solution or any 
 other indicator. Then with constant stirring add (a 
 drop or so at a time) dilute hydrochloric acid until the 
 blue color changes into a lavender. If too much acid is 
 added, the color will be pink. In that case add some 
 more sodium hydroxid solution, a drop at a time, so as 
 to get the color just blue, and then a very small drop 
 of the acid. When the intermediate color has been 
 obtained, evaporate to dryness. Examine the product 
 as to its physical properties and try its action on litmus 
 paper, as well as upon other indicators that you may hap- 
 pen to have at hand. What is the substance ? Repeat 
 these operations, using dilute nitric acid instead of 
 hydrochloric. 
 
 OXIDS OF NITROGEN; NITRIC ACID 
 
 EXPERIMENT 94. Preparation and Properties of 
 Nitrous Oxid. Put about 15^- (6 cm - circle) of ammo- 
 nium nitrate, NH 4 NO 3 , into a flask (or retort) provided 
 with a delivery tube and an interposed safety bottle 28 
 (Fig. 51). Heat the flask gently and collect a couple 
 of receivers full of the gas by water displacement. 
 Plunge a lighted splinter of wood into a receiver full 
 of the gas. Is the gas combustible or a supporter of 
 combustion ? Set a little red phosphorus or sulfur on 
 fire in a combustion spoon and introduce it into the gas. 
 What other gas behaves in a fashion similar to nitrous 
 oxid ? How would you distinguish the two gases ? 
 
Elementary Chemistry 
 
 Fig. 51 APPARATUS FOR PREPARING NITROUS OXID 
 
 EXPERIMENT 95. Nitric Oxid ; Its Preparation 
 and Properties. Put about io& of copper 29 (in the 
 form of filings, turnings, bits of wire, or granulated) in 
 a gas generator; just cover it with water 30 and add 
 enough strong nitric acid to cause a brisk evolution of 
 the gas. Add water if the reaction becomes too tumul- 
 tuous. Collect by water displacement six receivers full 
 of the pure gas, saving two receivers full for Experi- 
 ment 98. Let a little of the gas escape from one of the 
 receivers. What causes it to turn brown as soon as it 
 comes in contact with the air ? Insert a lighted splin- 
 ter into one of the receivers. Is the gas combustible 
 or a supporter of combustion ? Introduce a combustion 
 spoon containing burning red phosphorus into a receiver 
 full. Compare the result with that obtained with 
 nitrous oxid. 
 
 NOTE 29. Ferrous Sulfate. Ferrous sulfate (also known as 
 green vitriol and copperas) may be advantageously substituted for 
 
Experiments ji 
 
 the copper. It should be in the form of small lumps or crystals, 
 and strong nitric acid added. The reaction is more easily con- 
 trolled and a purer gas is obtained. 
 
 NOTE 30. Use Hot Water. As nitrous oxid is rather soluble 
 in cold water, it is advisable to have the pneumatic trough filled 
 with as hot water as convenient. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 96. Volumetric Composition of 
 Nitric Oxid. Obtain a glass tube about 20 cm - long 
 and of about i cm - bore, sealed at one end. Fit over the 
 open end a piece of tightly-fitting rubber tubing about 
 gem. long and have ready two Hofmann clamps (Fig. 
 52). Fill the glass and rubber tube with water and 
 then displace the water with pure nitric oxid, prepared 
 by the reduction of nitric acid by ferrous sulfate. Pinch 
 the tube tightly near the glass tube with one of the 
 clamps, A, and, removing the tube from the water, fill 
 the rubber tube nearly full with an intimate mixture of 
 equal bulks of powdered iron and sulfur. Then close 
 the tube near its end with the second clamp, B. Now 
 open the first clamp so that the mixture of iron and 
 sulfur may fall into the tube. Shake the tube at inter- 
 vals of fifteen to twenty minutes. Then turn the tube 
 upside down and shake as much as possible of the solid 
 
 Fig. 52 APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING THE VOLUMETRIC COMPOSITION 
 
 OF NITRIC OXID 
 
 mixture clown into the rubber tubing. Close the clamp 
 A, as before, open clamp />, and after shaking out the 
 solid mixture, fill the rubber tubing brimful of water, 
 close it with the thumb and place the tubing under 
 water. Now open clamp A What happens? 
 
 With a rubber band or piece of cotton cord mark the 
 volume of the gas remaining. What gas is it ? Ascer- 
 tain the volume of this and that of the nitric oxid taken 
 
72 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 at first by running 1 in water from a burette or by weigh- 
 ing-. What conclusion do you draw as to the volume of 
 oxygen and nitrogen composing nitric oxid ? 
 
 * EXPERIMENT 97. Nitrogen Dioxid. Heat in a test 
 tube a few crystals of manganous nitrate, Mn(NO 3 ) 2 , 
 or lead nitrate, Pb(NO 3 ) 2 . The main gaseous product 
 is nitrogen peroxid. Is it soluble in water ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 98. Illustration of the Law of Vol- 
 umetric Proportions* Prepare two gasometric tubes 
 as follows : Obtain two test tubes about 2$ cm - long and 
 i cm - wide. Fill the small tube even full of water and 
 empty it into one of the large tubes, and mark the 
 position of the water level with a rubber band. Add a 
 second tube full and mark the position of the water 
 level, and continue in this way until the tube is full. 
 Proceed in like manner with the second large tube. 
 
 Introduce into one of the gasometric tubes two vol- 
 umes of nitric oxid (best prepared from nitric acid and 
 ferrous sulfate), and into the other, five volumes of air. 
 Pass the contents of one tube into the other. 31 What 
 is observed ? In two or three minutes read the volume 
 of the residual gas. What gas is formed when nitric 
 oxid comes in contact with oxygen ? Is it soluble in 
 water ? Explain the contraction. 
 
 Repeat this procedure at least twice, so as to be sure 
 of the results, each time transferring the residual gas 
 into a receiver so that it may be examined and tested as 
 follows : Measure out from the receiver three volumes 
 and add a measured volume of air. Is there any con- 
 traction ? If so, add some more air, and see if there is 
 any contraction. In the same fashion, add volumes of 
 nitric oxid to a measured volume of the residual gas 
 and continue the additions until there is no contraction. 
 Point out in detail how this experiment illustrates the 
 law in question. 
 
Experiments 
 
 73 
 
 NOTE 31. Transferring Gases. To transfer gases from ne 
 vessel into another, the pneumatic trough must be deep enough 
 to allow of the complete submerging of the vessels. They are 
 then placed so that the gas from one may rise and displace the 
 water in the other. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 99. Preparation and Properties of 
 Nitric Acid. Put into a retort about 15 ff. (5 cm - circle) 
 of powdered soditim or potassium nitrate and add about 
 30 c.c. of strong sul- 
 furic acid. Arrange 
 the apparatus (Fig. 
 53) so that the retort's 
 neck passes nearly to 
 the bottom of a test 
 tube or flask set in a 
 dish filled with cold 
 water. Heat gently 
 with interposed wire 
 gauze, noting the be- 
 havior of the mixture 
 in the retort. When 
 the test tube is about a quarter full of the distillate 
 remove the flame ; be sure that the end of the retort's 
 neck is not dipping below the surface of the acid in the 
 test tube. 
 
 CAUTION. Be very careful not to spill nitric 
 acid on the hands; it produces very bad burns. 
 
 Note the color of the nitric acid thus prepared, and 
 compare it with that of a freshly-opened bottle of the 
 commercial "c. p." article. How do you account for 
 the difference ? Cautiously note its odor. Pour a few 
 drops on a glass plate or watch crystal and place beside 
 it a glass plate or watch crystal containing a little 
 strong ammonia water. How do you account for the 
 result ? Put a bit of litmus paper in a dish and add a 
 few drops of acid from the test tube ; repeat after 
 
 
 Fig. S3 PREPARING NITRIC ACID 
 
74 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 diluting the acid with about four times its volume of 
 water. Take up a drop on a stirring" rod and touch it 
 to your finger-nail or a quill ; wash it off promptly and 
 put on a drop of ammonium hydroxid. Test its action 
 both when cold and when hot on a little of the follow- 
 ing metals placed in separate test tubes : iron, copper, 
 zinc, lead, and mercury. Pour a drop or so into a little 
 indigo solution. Put a drop on a piece of newspaper 
 and on a piece of the best linen writing paper. Is the 
 difference in the action sufficient to distinguish news- 
 paper (which is made from wood pulp) from writing 
 paper (which is made from Jinen rags)? What is the 
 paper of your notebook made of, wood pulp or linen? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 100. Decomposition of Nitric Acid 
 by Heat. Support a long-stemmed tobacco pipe on a 
 stand so that its mouthpiece just dips below the water 
 in a dish, Heat the stem red-hot with a Bunsen flame 
 and then pour a few drops of concentrated nitric acid 
 into the bowl so that it may flow down through the 
 heated portion. What makes the bubbles have a 
 reddish-brown color while the gas which collects in 
 the receiver is colorless ? Into what three substances 
 is the nitric acid decomposed ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 101. Reduction of Nitric Acid to 
 Ammonia. Put a little granulated zinc into a test tube 
 and add about 5 c - c - of dilute sulfuric acid. After the 
 hydrogen is escaping freely, add a drop at a time (a 
 "medicine dropper" will be found convenient, or a little 
 pipette easily made by drawing out to a jet a piece of 
 glass tubing), very dilute nitric acid, noting carefully 
 what happens when each drop is added. Add only 
 about a dozen drops of the nitric acid. After a few 
 minutes pour part of the solution into another test 
 tube and add an excess of caustic soda solution. Warm 
 a little and cautiously smell of the contents of the tube. 
 
Experimcn ts 75 
 
 What evidence is there that ammonia is being given 
 off ? Verify your conclusion by the use of litmus paper 
 and by Nessler's solution. How do you explain the 
 formation of the ammonia ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 102. Reduction of a Nitrate to a 
 Nitrite. Heat 15^- of sodium or potassium nitrate with 
 30^- of lead in an iron dish (sand bath pan), stirring the 
 melted mixture with a stiff iron wire or long nail until 
 most of the lead has disappeared. Transfer the cooled 
 mass to a mortar, grind it to a powder, add hot water, 
 stir well and filter. To a portion of the filtrate add a 
 few drops of concentrated sulf uric acid, or potassium or 
 barium nitrate. The yellowish-brown powder formed 
 during the heating is lead oxid. What is the source of 
 the oxygen combining with the lead ? How must the 
 nitrate have been changed ? 
 
 PREPARATION AND PROPERTIES OF ACIDS, 
 BASES, AND SALTS 
 
 EXPERIMENT 103. Preparation of a Salt (Mercury 
 lodid) by Direct Union of the Elements. Weigh on 
 a watch glass 2.5^- of mercury 32 , and then also on a 
 watch glass ^.2^- of iodin 33 . Place the mercury in a 
 clean mortar and just cover it with alcohol 34 . Add 
 about a quarter of the iodin and rub it gently into the 
 mercury until the iodin as such seems to have dis- 
 appeared. Then mix in a second quarter-portion and 
 continue until all the iodin is added and the mixture is 
 dry and of a bright red color. Transfer the product to 
 a test tube and add about 5 c - c - of alcohol. Heat the 
 alcohol to boiling for a minute or so by immersing the 
 end of the tube in boiling water contained in a beaker. 
 Pour the solution into an evaporating dish and set 
 aside to cool. Examine carefully the crystals of mer- 
 cury iodid which separate out. Place a few of them 
 
76 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 in a dry test tube and cause them to sublime by heat- 
 ing the rounded end of the tube. How do you account 
 for the different colors of the sublimate ? Rub it with 
 a glass rod and note any change of color 35 . 
 
 NOTE 32. Pipette for Handling Mercury. A convenient way 
 to handle small quantities of mercury is by means of a little pipette 
 made by drawing out a piece of narrow glass tubing to a long, 
 tapering point. Mercury is drawn up into the pipette by suction. 
 If the tube then be held in an almost horizontal position, the 
 mercury will not run out, and may be nicely discharged where 
 wan ted" by inclining the pipette a little. 
 
 NOTE 33. Danger of Corrosion. As both mercury and iodin 
 corrode brass, great care must be exercised not to let them or their 
 fumes come in contact with the brass parts of a balance. Be sure 
 to collect any of either element whteh may become scattered about 
 the balance through careless handling. 
 
 NOTE 34. Addition of Alcohol. The reason for adding alcohol 
 is to keep down the temperature (the heat of the reaction will be 
 expended largely in evaporating the alcohol) and to bring the 
 iodin and mercury in more intimate contact. The alcohol does 
 not participate in the reaction at all. 
 
 NOTE 35. Iodin Stains. Iodin stains may be removed by 
 means of sodium sulfite or ammonium sulfid solution. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 104. Preparation of a Salt (Zinc Sul- 
 fate) by the Solution of a Metal (Zinc) in an Acid 
 (Sulfuric). Place about 5^- of zinc in a beaker or flask 
 and add about 40 c - c - of dilute sulfuric acid. When the 
 evolution of hydrogen has nearly ceased, filter the solu- 
 tion into an evaporating dish and gently heat 3 6 over a 
 wire gauze nearly to boiling, until a thin film appears 
 on the surface of the solution. Then set it aside so 
 that it may cool slowly. At frequent intervals for 
 several days examine the crystals which separate out 
 and carefully note their form. Remove them from the 
 solution and dry them by pressing between folds of 
 filter paper. Do the crystals contain water of crystal- 
 lization ? 
 
 NOTE 36. Slow Evaporation. Instead of evaporating off the 
 water rapidly by heating, the dish may be set aside so that the 
 water may slowly evaporate during several days. If this be 
 done, better and larger crystals will be obtained. 
 
Experiments 
 
 77 
 
 EXPERIMENT 105. Preparation of a Salt (Ammo- 
 nium C/tlorid) by the Neutralization of Ammonium 
 Hydroxid by Hydrochloric Acid. Dilute 25 c-c. of con- 
 centrated hydrochloric 
 acid with an equal vol- 
 ume of water, mix well, 
 and fill a burette with the 
 mixture 3 7 . Fill a second 
 burette with concentrated 
 ammonium hydroxid 
 (Fig. 54). Run 5.0^- of 
 the acid into an evaporat- 
 ing dish which has pre- 
 viously been weighed to 
 centigrams, and add just 
 enough litmus solution to 
 impart a distinctly pink 
 color. Note the reading 
 on the burette containing 
 the ammonium hydroxid, 
 and run the solution, a 
 few drops at a time, into 
 the acid, with constant 
 stirring, until the red 
 color turns to blue. Then 
 run in the acid, drop by 
 drop, stirring after each 
 addition, until the color is 
 half-way between blue and 
 red. Evaporate the solu- 
 tion to dryness on a water 
 bath 2 2 (the ammonium chlorid volatilizes at a higher tem- 
 perature), let cool and weigh. Again heat for a quarter of 
 an hour and weigh, continuing in this way until the salt 
 is perfectly dry, as shown by no further loss in weight. 
 
 Fig. 54 BURETTES ARRANGED FOR NEU- 
 TRALIZING A BASE BY AN ACID TO PRO- 
 DUCE A SALT 
 
78 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 The equation for this neutralization reaction may be 
 written thus : 
 
 NH 4 OH + HC1 -> NH 4 C1 + H 2 O 
 
 How many grams of NH 4 C1 have you prepared ? Calcu- 
 late how much NH 4 OH and HC1 were needed. How 
 much NH 4 OH and HC1 were contained in the volume 
 of the solutions used? Calculate how many grams of 
 NH 4 OH and of HC1 there would be in a liter of a solu- 
 tion of the same concentration. 
 
 NOTE 37. Drying the Burette. If the burette is not perfectly 
 dry, it should be rinsed out, delivery tube and all, with a few 
 cubic centimeters of the acid before filling. The ammonium 
 hydroxid burette should also be rinsed out with that liquid. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 106. The Solubility Product. Pre- 
 pare a saturated solution of sodium chloric!, NaCl, by 
 shaking the solid in a test tube with water until no 
 more is dissolved. The solution will not be accelerated 
 by heating, as sodium chlorid is nearly as soluble in 
 cold water as in hot. Fill a test tube a quarter full 
 with this saturated solution. Put a few cubic centi- 
 meters of concentrated hydrochloric acid in a test tube 
 provided with a cork and delivery tube, heat gently, 
 and pass the hydrogen chlorid expelled from solution 
 into the solution of salt. Prove experimentally that 
 the white substance precipitated is sodium chlorid, and 
 explain its formation. 
 
 THE HALOGENS AND THEIR HYDROGEN 
 COMPOUNDS 
 
 EXPERIMENT 107. Chlorin by Oxidization of Hy- 
 drochloric Acid. Into separate test tubes put a pinch 
 of potassium chlorate, of red lead, and of potassium 
 dichromate, and add a little strong hydrochloric acid to 
 each. If a reaction does not take place promptly, warm 
 a little. Note the physical properties of the gaseous 
 
Experiments 
 
 79 
 
 product, and then stop the action by filling the tube up 
 with water. What are the color and other properties 
 of this solution ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 108. Preparation of Chlorin. I. 
 (Hood.) Into a flask (200 to 300 c - c -} fitted with a delivery 
 tube and an interposed safety bottle (Fig. 55), put about 
 20 ff- (5^- circle) of 
 manganese dioxid 
 and add to it 50^- 
 strong hydro- 
 chloric acid. The 
 delivery tube 
 should reach to 
 the bottom of the 
 receiver, which 
 should be snugly 
 covered with a 
 piece of cardboard 
 pierced with a 
 hole for the pas- 
 sage of the delivery tube. Heat the flask gently and 
 collect by downward displacement four receivers full 
 of the gas. You can tell by the greenish color when 
 the receivers are full, and the full receivers should be 
 covered with glass slips smeared with a little vaseline 
 so as to make gas-tight joints. Pass to Experiment no. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 109. Preparation of Chlorin. II. 
 (Hood.) Into a gas generator fitted with a stopcock 
 funnel (Fig. 18) put about enough of bleaching powder 
 to cover the bottom of the generator to a depth of a 
 centimeter. The delivery tube should reach to the bot- 
 tom of the receiver, which should be covered with a 
 piece of cardboard with a hole through it for the passage 
 of the delivery tube. Let strong hydrochloric acid drop 
 from the funnel upon the bleaching powder just fast 
 
 Fig. 55 PREPARING CHLORIN 
 
8o Elementary Chemistry 
 
 enough to keep up a brisk evolution of the gas, and col- 
 lect four receivers full by downward displacement, cov- 
 ering a receiver when full (as shown by the green color) 
 with a glass slip smeared with vaseline. Pass to Ex- 
 periment no. 
 
 EXPERIMENT no. Properties of Chlorin. (Hood.) 
 Thrust a piece of flaming paper into a receiver filled 
 with chlorin, moving the glass slip only a little aside 
 and at once covering the receiver again so as to prevent 
 the fumes from escaping. Is the gas combustible? 
 Does it support combustion ? Moving the glass slip 
 aside again, sprinkle a pinch of powdered antimony 
 into the gas. Also introduce a loose bundle of very 
 fine brass or copper wires which have been heated to 
 redness. Is the gas a supporter of combustion ? Com- 
 pare it in this respect with oxygen. 
 
 Into a second receiver put some paper with writing 
 (both by ink and by pencil) on it and some pieces of 
 dry calico, and into a third some paper with writing on 
 it and some pieces of moistened calico. What differ- 
 ences are to be observed in the bleaching action in the 
 two receivers ? Repeat with the fourth receiver any of 
 the above experiments, the results of which you are in 
 doubt about and wish to verify. 
 
 EXPERIMENT m. Chlorin Water. Drop into a 
 test tube a few small crystals of potassium chlorate, 
 cover them with concentrated hydrochloric acid diluted 
 with an equal volume of water, warm a little, and as 
 soon as the chlorin begins to escape from the tube, fill 
 it nearly full of water. Pour a little indigo solution 
 into a test tube and add an equal volume of the chlorin 
 water. Is the color discharged ? Try the action of the 
 chiorin water on solutions of litmus, of cochineal, and 
 of copper sulfate. Explain any differences in the 
 bleaching action. 
 
Experiments 
 
 81 
 
 EXPERIMENT 112. Preparation and Properties of 
 Bromin. Put about 10^- (^ cm - circle) of potassium 
 bromid in a mortar and add an equal bulk of man- 
 ganese dioxid. Mix them well together and introduce 
 the mixture into a dry retort, and then add about io c - c - 
 of concentrated 
 sulfur ic acid. 
 Support the re- 
 tort on the stand 
 so that its neck 
 may enter a test 
 tube or flask set 
 in a dish filled 
 with cold water 
 (Fig. 56). Put a 
 little water in the 
 test tube and ad- 
 just so that the 
 
 neck of the retort just dips into the water. Heat the 
 retort very gently and collect the bromin given off until 
 no more red vapor is seen in the retort. Note the phys- 
 ical properties of the bromin. 
 
 Pour a drop or so of bromin into a dry receiver, 
 cover with a piece of paper or a glass slip, and shake 
 and invert the receiver so that the bromin may rapidly 
 vaporize and its vapors fill the vessel. Try its bleach- 
 ing action as was done with chlorin and compare 
 results. Pour what bromin is left into the bottle 
 labeled "Bromin" which is standing on the side table. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 113. Preparation and Properties of 
 lodin. Grind well together in a mortar a half dozen 
 crystals of potassium iodid with an equal bulk of man- 
 ganese dioxid, put the mixture in an Erlenmeyer flask, 
 and add about 15^- of a mixture of equal volumes of 
 concentrated sulfuric acid and water. (Pour the acid 
 
82 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 into the water, not the water into the acid.) Set the 
 flask on a wire gauze on a ring stand, and insert in 
 its neck loosely a perforated cork holding a small test 
 tube filled with cold water (Fig. 57). Another appara- 
 tus is a tall, slender beaker with a watch glass cover- 
 ing it and filled with cold 
 water (Fig. 58). Heat the 
 flask with a very small 
 flame, just enough to 
 cause the iodin liberated 
 from the potassium iodid 
 to vaporize and collect on 
 the sides of the test tube 
 kept at a low temperature 
 by the cold water. When 
 the test tube is covered 
 with crystals of iodin, dis- 
 continue the heating, re- 
 move the test tube, and 
 scrape the iodin into an 
 evaporating dish. Note 
 its physical properties. 
 
 Fig. 57 PREPARING IODIN ' ln J 1 . 
 
 Heat a small crystal in 
 
 a dry test tube and when the tube is filled with the 
 vapor, invert it and draw conclusions as to the relative 
 weights of air and iodin vapor. Touch your finger to 
 a crystal. What is the color of the stain ? Will water 
 remove it ? Will alcohol ? Will a solution of potassium 
 iodid? In which of these three liquids is iodin readily 
 soluble? Place the rest of the iodin in the bottle 
 labeled " Iodin " which is standing on the side table. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 114. Tests for Free Bromin and 
 Iodin. Prepare a test tube full of chlorin water (Ex- 
 periment in). Dissolve a bit of potassium iodid and of 
 potassium bromid not larger than a pinhead in a small 
 
Experiments 
 
 test tube a quarter full of water, a different test tube 
 for each substance. Make some thin starch paste by 
 rubbing up a small lump (5 mm -) of starch with a little 
 water in a mortar to the consistence of cream, and then 
 boiling it in an evaporating dish with about 50^- of 
 water until it is clear. 
 Pour three or four 
 drops of this starch 
 paste into 10^- of 
 water in a test tube 
 and shake it up well ; 
 then add a drop of an 
 aqueous solution of 
 iodin. What is the 
 change in color? 
 Heat the solution 
 gently until the color 
 disappears, and then 
 cool it by immersing 
 in cold water. This 
 is a very delicate test 
 for iodin when not in 
 
 Combination. Repeat Fig. 58 ANOTHER APPARATUS FOR PREPAR- 
 
 this test, using bro- 
 
 min water instead of an iodin solution. Is the test as 
 
 decisive as for iodin ? 
 
 Pour three or four drops of starch paste into 10^- 
 of water in a test tube, shake it up well, and add a drop 
 or so of the solution of potassium iodid you have pre- 
 pared. Is there any change of color ? Now add a dozen 
 or so drops of the chlorin water. Explain what occurs. 
 Repeat with the solution of potassium bromid instead 
 of the iodid. Compare the results. 
 
 Put a couple of drops of an aqueous solution of 
 iodin in about io c - c - of water in a test tube, add about 
 
84 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 2 c-c. of carbon bisulfid, and shake the two liquids well 
 together. Does the color of the carbon bisulfid change ? 
 Repeat, using a solution of bromin instead of iodin. 
 Compare the two results. Repeat, using a solution of 
 chlorin water. Does this give a decisive test ? 
 
 Add about 2 c - c - of carbon bisulfid to the solution of 
 potassium iodid prepared and shake them well together. 
 Does the color change? Add a few drops of chlorin 
 water and shake. What result? Repeat, using the 
 solution of potassium bromid. Compare results. Could 
 you prove by these tests that bromin was present in a 
 solution of unknown composition if iodin was also pres- 
 ent? Try it on a mixture of potassium bromid and 
 potassium iodid solutions. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 115. Action of Concentrated Sulfuric 
 Acid on Halid Salts. Place in separate test tubes a 
 couple of small crystals of sodium chlorid, of potassium 
 bromid, and of potassium iodid, and add to each about 
 2 c - c - of concentrated sulfuric acid. Cautiously compare 
 the smells of the gases evolved. Heat gently and note 
 the appearance of any colored gases, if they have not 
 been noticeable without heating. What elements are 
 set free ? 
 
 Put a pinch of calcium fluorid (fluorspar) in a small 
 test tube and add about 2 c - c - of concentrated sulfuric 
 acid. Heat until a gas is given off vigorously. Note 
 the physical properties of this gas and after five min- 
 utes or so pour out the reacting mixture into a plentiful 
 supply of water. Wash out the test tube and see if the 
 glass has lost its transparency in spots, and if so, account 
 for it. 
 
 To clean the test tubes pour their contents out into 
 a large amount of water. Do not run water into tJie 
 tubes upon the hot sulfuric acid, as there is danger of an 
 explosion. 
 
Experiments 
 
 EXPERIMENT 116. Preparation and Properties of 
 Hydrochloric Acid. Put io c - c - of cold water in a 
 beaker and add to it slowly and with constant stirring, 
 SQC.C. of concentrated sulfuric acid. Set the mixture 
 aside to cool. Put about 30^- (6 cm - circle) of common 
 salt in a flask provided with a safety bottle and delivery 
 tube, to the end 
 of which may be 
 attached a small 
 funnel (Fig. 59) 
 or a straight piece 
 of large glass tub- 
 ing. Add the cold 
 acid and heat 
 gently with the 
 funnel attached 
 to the end of the 
 delivery tube, un- 
 til the gas given 
 off is nearly all 
 absorbed by the 
 water in which 
 the rim of the funnel just dips. Then collect by down- 
 ward displacement four dry receivers of the gas, cov- 
 ering them with glass plates when full. Let the gas 
 pass into some distilled water contained in a dish, using 
 the funnel attachment, and save the solution for Expe- 
 riment 1 1 8. 
 
 Invert a receiver full of the gas and, holding its 
 mouth under water in a pneumatic trough, open it. 
 How do you account for what happens ? What other 
 gas studied has exhibited a similar property ? Thrust 
 a blazing splinter of wood into a second receiver. Does 
 the gas burn or support combustion ? Hold a piece of 
 wet filter paper over the mouth of another receiver. 
 
 Fig. 59 PREPARING HYDROCHLORIC ACID 
 
86 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 What is the cause of the phenomenon? Drop in the 
 last receiver a piece of filter paper moistened with 
 strong" ammonia water. What happens ? What is the 
 substance formed ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 117. Analysis of Hydrogen Chlorid. 
 (a) Place a bit (3 ) of sodium in a bulb tube (Fig. 60), 
 support it horizontally, and connect it on one side with a 
 
 generator from which a brisk 
 current of hydrogen chlorid 
 (generated by dropping con- 
 Fig. 60 sutB TUBE centrated sulfuric acid into 
 concentrated hydrochloric acid contained in a stopcock 
 generator) is issuing, and on 'the other with a delivery 
 tube. As soon as all the air has been swept from the 
 tube (How can that be told?), heat the sodium cau- 
 tiously until it takes fire. Now collect in a test tube a 
 sample of the gas given off and discharge it into a flame. 
 What is the gas ? 
 
 When the sodium no longer burns, disconnect the 
 generator (letting the gas pass into water by means of 
 a funnel, as described in Experiment 116), and, after 
 the bulb tube has cooled, break it open and prove by 
 appropriate tests that common salt, NaCl, has been 
 formed. In the burning of the sodium, what substances 
 were the combustible and the supporter of combustion, 
 respectively ? 
 
 (b) Put some manganese dioxid into an evaporating 
 dish and heat as hot as possible for about ten minutes 
 so as to remove all moisture from the dioxid. Arrange 
 an apparatus . as shown in Fig. 31. Place in the tube 
 some of the manganese dioxid and connect with the gas 
 generator. As the hydrogen chlorid passes through 
 the tube, heat the manganese dioxid gently by just 
 brushing a flame along the tube. Collect the gas given 
 off over water and establish its identity by suitable tests. 
 
Experiments 87 
 
 How do you account for the moisture that collects just 
 beyond the dioxid ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 118. Tests for Chlorids, Bromids, 
 and lodids. Prepare dilute solutions (about 3 per cent) 
 of sodium chlorid, of potassium bromid, and of potas- 
 sium iodid. To a few drops each of these solutions add 
 an equal volume of silver nitrate solution. Compare 
 the colors and properties of the precipitates. Boil the 
 solutions and note the behavior of the precipitates. Add 
 ammonium hydroxid until pieces of litmus paper placed 
 in the tubes are blue, shake well, and note which pre- 
 cipitates dissolve. What is the effect of adding enough 
 nitric acid to make the litmus red ? 
 
 Add silver nitrate solution to a little of the solution 
 of hydrogen chlorid prepared in Experiment 116, and 
 to as many chlorids, bromids, and iodids as are available. 
 How do all the results compare ? How can a test for a 
 fluorid be devised from Experiment 115 ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 119. {Quantitative.} To Find the 
 Atomic Weight of Chlorin. Clean, dry, and weigh 
 to centigrams an evaporating dish. Fill it about one- 
 fourth full of finely powdered sodium chlorid and heat 
 until decrepitation ceases. Let cool and weigh. Cover 
 the salt with strong nitric acid, evaporate to dryness on 
 a water bath, and heat with free flame until the sodium 
 nitrate which has been formed just begins to melt. Let 
 cool and weigh. To make sure that all the chlorin has 
 been expelled, moisten the salt with concentrated nitric 
 acid, heat and weigh again, repeating until a constant 
 weight is obtained. 
 
 The reaction is : 
 
 NaCl + HN0 3 > NaNO 3 + HC1 
 
 A known weight (a) of sodium chlorid is converted into a 
 known weight (6) of sodium nitrate. If the atomic weight of 
 chlorin be denoted by .r, and those of sodium, nitrogen, and 
 
88 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 oxygen arc 23, 14, and 16, respectively, then the molecular weight 
 of NaCl is: + ^ 
 
 and that of NaNO 3 is : 
 
 23 + 14 + (3 X 16)1=85 
 
 a 23 + x 
 Then -= 
 b 8 
 
 85 a 23 b 
 
 and x = 
 
 b 
 
 EXPERIMENT 120. (Quantitative^ To Ascertain 
 the Strength of a Given Sample of Hydrochloric 
 Acid. Fill a burette with the acid to be tested. Put 
 about IQC-C- of a 5 per cent solution of sodium hydroxid 
 in an evaporating dish, and add a few drops of some 
 indicator. Run the acid into the alkali with constant 
 stirring until neutralization is obtained. Evaporate to 
 dryness without spattering. Heat the dish to constant 
 weight. Calculate the weight of hydrogen chlorid in 
 one liter of the solution. 
 
 The equation for the neutralization of sodium hydroxid by 
 hydrochloric acid is : 
 
 NaOH + HC1 > NaCl + H 2 O 
 
 40 + 36.5 58-5 + 18 
 
 from which it is seen that 58. $& of NaCl are formed when 36. 5 
 of HC1 are used. The weight of the HC1 in the volume of the 
 solution taken stands then in the same ratio to the weight of the 
 NaCl found as does 36.5 to 58.5. The weight of HC1 contained 
 in a liter of the acid solution is calculated by means of the pro- 
 portion : 
 
 Volume of acid taken inc-c. Weight of acid found 
 1,000 c - c - x 
 
 EXPERIMENT 121. (Quantitative^] To Find the 
 Strength of a Given Sample of Nitric Acid. The 
 
 directions of Experiment 1 20 apply to rinding the 
 strength of a given sample of nitric acid ; sodium 
 nitrate is formed. 
 
Experiments 89 
 
 THE ALKALI METALS 
 
 EXPERIMENT 122. Properties of Sodium and 
 Potassium, (a) Examine a small piece of sodium ; 
 note its most obvious properties, such as color, luster, 
 and hardness. Cut a slice off it and immediately note 
 the metallic luster. Review Experiment 23 (action of 
 sodium on water). Cautiously dissolve a small piece 
 in a little water in an evaporating dish. What is the 
 action of the solution on litmus ? Evaporate to dryness 
 and examine residue carefully. What is it ? 
 
 (b) Repeat (), using" potassium. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 123. Preparation and Properties of 
 Potassium Carbonate, (a] Fill a test tube half full of 
 hardwood ashes, cover with water, shake well together, 
 warm gently and filter. Test the filtrate (i) with both 
 blue and pink litmus paper, (2) for potassium (Experi- 
 ment 127), and (3) for a carbonate (add HC1 ; a result- 
 ing effervescence indicates CO 2 ). 
 
 (b} Put about 5^- (4^- circle) of cream of tartar 
 (acid potassium tartrate) in an iron dish and heat 
 strongly in the hood until the residue is white. Grind 
 the residue in a mortar with water, filter, and apply the 
 same tests as in (a). 
 
 (c) Mix thoroughly about 5^- (^ cm. circle) of pow- 
 dered potassium nitrate with an equal bulk of powdered 
 charcoal, and place the mixture in an evaporating dish. 
 Heat an iron dish or plate red-hot and, standing at 
 arm's length and grasping the evaporating dish with 
 tongs, pour the mixture upon the iron. If it does not 
 deflagrate at once, heat still hotter, being careful not 
 to have your face or hands above the mixture. When 
 deflagration has occurred and the product is cool, grind 
 it in a mortar with a little water, filter, and test the ni- 
 trate as in (a}. 
 
90 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 EXPERIMENT 124. Preparation and Properties of 
 Sodium and Potassium Hydroxids. Make a solution 
 of about 50 & (10 cm - circle) of sodium carbonate in about 
 300 c-c. of water and place it in an iron dish. To about 
 20 ff- of lime add enough water to slake it and make a 
 milky mixture, "milk of lime." Heat the sodium car- 
 bonate solution to gentle boiling, add the milk of lime 
 and boil for five minutes, stirring constantly with a large 
 nail or a file. Let the precipitate settle, draw off a 
 little of the clear liquid with a tube drawn out so as to 
 form a small pipette, 3 2 transfer it to a test tube and add 
 an equal volume of dilute hydrochloric acid. If there 
 is effervescence, all of the 'sodium carbonate has not 
 been changed into the hydroxid ; so add a little more 
 milk of lime and boil. If there is no effervescence, 
 decant the clear liquid into a beaker. As sodium 
 hydroxid attacks glass and porcelain, it is not advisable 
 to evaporate the solution to dryness. The solution may 
 be preserved in a rubber-stoppered bottle, labeled 
 "Sodium Hydroxid," for use in subsequent work. 
 
 Examine a piece of commercial sodium hydroxid 
 and note its most prominent physical properties. 
 
 Potassium hydroxid is to be prepared according to 
 the same directions as given for sodium hydroxid, using 
 potassium carbonate instead of sodium carbonate. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 125. Preparation and Properties of 
 Ammonium Amalgam. Put about 2 c - c - of mercury 
 into a dry test tube, add a small piece (2 "**) of sodium, 
 cork the test tube very loosely, and heat gently. As 
 soon as a flash of light has indicated that the sodium 
 has formed an amalgam with the mercury, introduce 
 another piece of sodium, heat, if necessary, as before, 
 and continue in this way until the amalgam has become 
 solid. (An evaporating dish may be used instead of 
 the test tube.) 
 
Experiments 91 
 
 Put about io c - c - of a strong solution of ammonium 
 chlorid in an evaporating dish, and introduce into it 
 about a quarter of the sodium amalgam. (The test 
 tube will probably have to be broken to get the amal- 
 gam out.) How does the amalgam change ? Take up 
 some of the substance in the fingers and describe its 
 "feel." What class of substances give this " feel " ? 
 
 Put the rest of the sodium amalgam into a test tube, 
 fill nearly full with strong ammonium chlorid solution, 
 and when the ammonium amalgam begins to run out of 
 the tube, fill it completely full with water, close with 
 the thumb and invert over water. Try to keep as much 
 of the ammonium amalgam as possible under the mouth 
 of the test tube so that the gas which forms may be 
 collected therein. When the test tube is full, test the 
 gas. What is it? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 126. Solvay Process of Sodium Car- 
 bonate Manufacture. Prepare saturated solutions 
 (about 100 <:) of ammonium carbonate and of sodium 
 chlorid by shaking the finely powdered salts for some 
 time with water. Decant the saturated solutions and 
 pass washed carbon dioxid into the ammonium car- 
 bonate until no more is absorbed. Now mix the two 
 solutions, stir well, and run in carbon dioxid. If a pre- 
 cipitate does not appear in a few minutes, shake well 
 for some time, and run in carbon dioxid again. When 
 a considerable amount of the precipitate has formed, 
 prove it to contain carbon dioxid and sodium by appro- 
 priate tests. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 127. Flame Tests. Wash apiece of 
 platinum wire as clean as possible and then hold it ir> 
 a Bunsen flame until the latter is no longer tinged by 
 vt. Dip its end in some sodium compound and bring 
 into the flame ; note the color. Clean the wire again, 
 dip into some potassium compound, and hold in the 
 
92 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 flame. Unless the potassium compound is entirely free 
 from an admixture of sodium compounds, its character- 
 istic color will be masked by that of sodium. When the 
 flame is observed through cobalt blue glass, however, 
 as the sodium flame color is absorbed, that of potassium 
 alone is seen. 
 
 If a lithium salt is available, familiarize yourself 
 with its flame test also. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 128. Preparation and Properties of 
 the Nitrates of the Alkali Metals, (a) Put a little 
 sodium hydroxid (or carbonate) into a dish, add a little 
 water, and with constant stirring dilute nitric acid 
 until a slightly acid reaction, (litmus paper) is obtained. 
 Set the dish aside and examine it from day to day. 
 
 (b) Go through similar operations with potassium 
 hydroxid or carbonate instead of sodium. 
 
 (c) When crystals have formed from both solutions, 
 remove several specimens of each and compare their 
 shape carefully. Write a careful description of each. 
 Do you now see any reason for calling sodium nitrate 
 cubical niter, as is sometimes done ? 
 
 (d) Heat a few crystals of potassium nitrate in a 
 test tube until they melt and effervesce. Now drop 
 into the tube a piece (2 ) of charcoal. Describe what 
 happens. Repeat with sulfur instead of charcoal. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 129. Test for a Nitrate. Fill a small 
 test tube about a fifth full of clear crystals of ferrous 
 sulfate (green vitriol), and then about half full of water. 
 Shake until a clear solution results. To this add a 
 crystal of potassium nitrate about the size of a pin- 
 head. 
 
 Fill another test tube about a sixth full of concen- 
 trated sulfuric acid and, holding both test tubes as 
 nearly horizontal as possible, run the solution upon the 
 sulfuric acid so that the two liquids mix as little as 
 
Experiments 93 
 
 possible. The brown ring shown where the solution 
 floats upon the acid indicates the presence of a nitrate. 
 Make a fresh solution of ferrous sulfate, and repeat 
 the test without adding 1 potassium nitrate. Does the 
 brown ring appear? 
 
 EQUIVALENT WEIGHTS 
 
 EXPERIMENT 130. (Quantitative^) Equivalent of 
 Sodium. Weigh out to centigrams a piece of clean 
 lead foil about 10 cm - square. Cut off a piece of sodium 
 (about 4 mm - long and 2 mm - cross section), scrape off 
 the coating of oxid and, after wiping it dry on filter 
 paper, roll it into a cylindrical form. The weight of 
 this cylinder should be about 0.9^-. Carefully roll the 
 sodium up in the foil, leaving one end open, but pinch- 
 ing the other end tightly together. By this arrange- 
 ment the exposed surface of the sodium alone can be 
 acted upon by water, and the evolution of hydrogen is 
 quite steady. Weigh to centigrams the sodium and foil. 
 The weight of the sodium is found by subtracting the 
 weight of the foil from that of the foil and sodium. 
 
 Fill a 500 c - c - graduated cylinder with water, close it 
 with a piece of paper, and invert it in a pneumatic 
 trough containing only a shallow depth of water. Drop 
 the sodium wrapped in the foil in the water and at once 
 place over it the inverted cylinder to catch all of the 
 escaping hydrogen. When no more gas is given off, 
 bring the water inside and outside the cylinder to the 
 same level by raising the cylinder or by pouring water 
 into the trough, and read off the volume. Also read 
 the barometer and the thermometer. Reduce the vol- 
 ume to standard conditions, correcting for aqueous ten- 
 sion, and multiply the reduced volume by 0.09 (the 
 weight of a liter of hydrogen) to find the weight of 
 hydrogen evolved. The quotient obtained by dividing 
 
94 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 the weight of the sodium by that of the hydrogen is the 
 equivalent of sodium. 
 
 EXPB:RIMENT 131. (Quantitative^) Equivalent of 
 Zinc. I. Weigh out to centigrams about 5 & of zinc 
 (chemically pure, if possible), and put it into a gas gen- 
 erator provided with a stopcock funnel. Connect the 
 generator with an aspirating bottle (Fig. 24) of at least 
 2 l - capacity. Cover the zinc with a little \vater and 
 close the stopcock. The delivery tube is placed in a 
 vessel of water with the levels of the liquid in the ves- 
 sel and in the aspirator the same when the delivery 
 tube is open. Close the delivery tube and place it in a 
 tared bottle or beaker holding at least 2 / -. 
 
 Measure out with a pipette or a graduate 50^- of 
 strong hydrochloric acid, put a portion of it in the stop- 
 cock funnel, open the cock cautiously and let the acid 
 run into the generator; be very careful to prevent any 
 air being drawn into the generator. Add the acid from 
 time to time so as to keep up a rapid evolution of the gas. 
 
 When no more hydrogen is given off, add all of the 
 acid, if it has not already all been added, arrange the 
 aspirating and receiving bottle so that their water 
 levels are the same and, opening the stopcock, let the 
 acid drain into the generator. Let the apparatus stand 
 for several minutes to come to the temperature of the 
 room, and then close the delivery tube and lift it out of 
 the receiving vessel. Weigh or measure the volume of 
 the water expelled from the aspirator by the hydrogen, 
 read the barometer and thermometer, and reduce the 
 volume to standard conditions, allowing for aqueous 
 tension. Multiply this reduced volume by 0.09 (the 
 weight of a liter of hydrogen) to get the weight of the 
 hydrogen evolved. Divide the weight of the zinc by 
 the weight of the hydrogen ; the quotient is the equiv- 
 alent of zinc desired. 
 
Experiments 95 
 
 EXPERIMENT 132. (Quantitative^ Equivalent of 
 Magnesium. The apparatus and operations are like 
 those in Experiment 131 : about 2?- of the metal should 
 be taken. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 133. (Quantitative.} Equivalent of 
 Zinc. II. (Hood.) Clean, dry, and weigh to centi- 
 grams an evaporating dish, together with a funnel, 
 which, when inverted, fits securely into the dish. Put 
 3 to 4-?- of zinc (preferably chemically pure, although 
 ordinary or mossy zinc will do) in the dish, replace the 
 funnel and weigh to centigrams. Support the dish on 
 a ring of a stand, and pour in beside the funnel a little 
 strong nitric acid so that it can flow under the funnel 
 and attack the zinc. As soon as the action subsides a 
 little, add more acid, and continue in this way until all 
 the acid is dissolved. Now evaporate to dryness, using 
 a large flame. When the contents of the dish appear 
 dry, gradually increase the heat, finally heating as hot 
 as possible for at least five minutes. Let the dish cool 
 and weigh it. Again heat to redness for several min- 
 utes and weigh, continuing in this way until the dish 
 and contents do not lose more than 3 c s- on heating. 
 
 The substance remaining is zinc oxid ; the zinc 
 nitrate at first formed is decomposed by the heating. 
 How many grams of zinc oxid have you obtained? 
 How much oxygen has combined with the zinc taken ? 
 What is the ratio of the weights of the zinc and oxy- 
 gen ? Taking the equivalent of oxygen as 8, what is 
 the equivalent of zinc as deduced from this experi- 
 ment? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 134. (Quantitative^ To Determine 
 the Vapor Density of Alcohol by Dumas' Method. 
 Fit a clean, dry flask (100 to 250 c - c -) with a one-hole 
 rubber stopper through which is thrust a bit of glass 
 tubing with its upper end drawn out to a diameter of 
 
Elementary Chemistry 
 
 about a millimeter (Fig. 61), and after rubbing the 
 stopper with a little vaseline so as to make it fit 
 gas-tight, weigh the apparatus to centigrams (or better, 
 
 milligrams). Take 
 the temperature and 
 pressure of the air. 
 
 Put about 20 c - c - of 
 alcohol into the flask 
 and immerse it up to 
 its neck in boiling 
 water contained in a 
 beaker or can, hold- 
 ing it submerged by 
 means of a clamp. 
 Take the temperature 
 of the boiling water. 
 When the alcohol has 
 almost all boiled 
 away bring a Bunsen 
 flame to the tip of the 
 glass tube, and as 
 soon as the alcohol 
 flame goes out (an in- 
 dication that the flask 
 contains only alcohol 
 vapor) seal off. 
 
 Weigh the flask 
 again with the same 
 degree of accuracy as 
 before. Hold the neck of the flask under water and 
 with tongs or pinchers break off the tip of the sealed 
 tube. The flask should promptly fill almost completely 
 with water; if it does not, the experiment must be 
 repeated. Weigh the flask thus filled with water, to 
 decigrams only, on a platform balance. The difference 
 
 Fig. 6l DETERMINING THE VAPOR DENSITY 
 OF ALCOHOL 
 
 A short piece of rubber tubing, closed by a pinch- 
 cock, is substituted for the glass tip 
 
Experiments 97 
 
 between the weights of the flask filled with water and 
 with air gives the weight of the water, which, as one 
 cubic centimeter of water weighs one gram, also gives 
 the volume of the air and of the alcohol vapor. 
 
 The calculation of the results are given on page 215 
 of the text. 
 
 SULFUR AND ITS COMPOUNDS 
 
 EXPERIMENT 135. Properties of Sulfur, (a) Re- 
 view the observations you made on sulfur in Experi- 
 ments i and 2. 
 
 (b) Fill a test tube nearly half full of sulfur and, 
 grasping it with a holder, heat it carefully. What is the 
 color of the sulfur just after it melts ? Pour a drop or 
 so into cold water and compare the product with the 
 original sulfur taken. Heat the tube so as to raise the 
 temperature of the melted sulfur gradually, and from 
 time to time tilt the tube. What changes occur in its 
 color and viscosity ? Do you find that at a certain tem- 
 perature the sulfur becomes so viscid that you can invert 
 the tube without the sulfur running out ? 
 
 Heat to boiling. Pour the boiling sulfur slowly and 
 in a thin stream into cold water contained in a dish or 
 beaker, moving the tube around so that the sulfur may 
 solidify in a long spiral rod. Examine the product, 
 especially as to color, hardness, and elasticity. Put it 
 away in the desk and examine it from time to time for 
 a week or so. What changes take place ? 
 
 (c) Fill a combustion cup with sulfur, set it on fire, 
 and then put the cup in the bottom of a wide-mouthed 
 bottle, covering it with a piece of cardboard. When 
 the sulfur ceases to burn, introduce a piece of dry blue 
 litmus paper. What change of color ? Then put in a 
 piece of wet blue litmus paper and note result. 
 
 (d) Review Experiment 7, I. 
 
98 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 NOTE. Experiment ij6 must be performed in the hood. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 136. Preparation and Properties of 
 Hydrogen Sulfid. Place a little ferrous sulfid in a 
 test tube and add some dilute sulfuric acid. If a gas is 
 not given off, heat gently. Attach a delivery tube and 
 collect a small test tube full of the gas by down- 
 ward displacement (Fig. 44). Ignite the gas and see if 
 you can detect the odor of burning sulfur. Pass the 
 gas for several minutes into about 2 C - C - of strong nitric 
 acid in a test tube. When the inside of the end of the 
 delivery tube becomes coated with a yellow substance, 
 substitute a new delivery tube and put it into a second 
 test tube filled with water. This will yield a solution 
 of hydrogen sulfid. Rinse out the first delivery tube, 
 pick out some of the deposit and by means of appropri- 
 ate tests establish its identity. 
 
 Add some of the hydrogen sulfid solution to a little 
 dilute copper sulfate, CuSO 4 , solution. Result ? Repeat 
 with lead acetate, Pb(C 2 H 3 O 2 ) 2 , solution; with cad- 
 mium sulfate, CdSO 4 , solution ; with potassium perman- 
 ganate (KMnO 4 ) solution, bromin water, and chlorin 
 water. What is the result in each case ? 
 
 If copper, lead, cadmium, and sulfur are all bivalent 
 elements, what are the formulas of the products ? Write 
 the equations for the reactions. Repeat these tests, 
 delivering the hydrogen sulfid gas directly into the 
 solutions of the salts. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 137. Preparation of Sulfur Dioxid. 
 
 (a) By the burning of sulfur. Review Experi- 
 ment 2. 
 
 (b) By the decomposition of sulfuric acid by copper. 
 Put about 10^- of copper in a flask provided with a 
 cork and delivery tube with interposed "safety bottle" 
 (Fig. 55), and add about 40 c - c - of strong sulfuric acid. 
 Heat the flask cautiously, removing the flame when the 
 
Experiments 99 
 
 effervescence may become too brisk, and collect two 
 receivers full by downward displacement. Cover the 
 bottles well and reserve for use in Experiment 138. 
 Let the gas pass into a beaker half full of water for a 
 few minutes, so as to prepare a solution of sulfur dioxid 
 (sulfurous acid). 
 
 (c) By t/ie action of dilute sulfuric acid on sodium 
 sulfite. Put a layer of sodium sulfite nearly a centi- 
 meter thick in the bottom of a gas generator, barely 
 cover it with water, and add through the funnel tube 
 from time to time dilute sulfuric acid so as to keep up a 
 rapid evolution of gas. Collect t\vo receivers full by 
 dow r nward displacement, cover them well and reserve 
 for Experiment 138. Prepare a solution of sulfur dioxid 
 by passing the gas into some water in a beaker or a 
 bottle, and save for Experiment 139. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 138. Properties of Sulfur Dioxid. 
 Bleaching Action, Place in a receiver full of sulfur 
 dioxid a piece of moistened calico, some petals of a red 
 flower (carnation), cover and allow to stand for half an 
 hour or so. What happens ? Remove the object intro- 
 duced and place it in a dish containing very dilute sul- 
 furic acid. What change in color ensues ? 
 
 Oxidation by Nitric Acid. Pour a few drops of 
 strong nitric acid into a receiver filled with sulfur 
 dioxid, cover and move the receiver around so that its 
 inside walls may become moistened with the acid. 
 What visible evidence is there that the nitric acid is 
 being reduced ? To prove that the sulfur dioxid has 
 been changed into the trioxid (which dissolves in the 
 water to form sulfuric acid), rinse out the receiver with 
 a little water, pour into a test tube and add barium 
 chlorid solution. The appearance of the white precipi- 
 tate of barium sulfate indicates the presence of sulfuric 
 acid. 
 
ioo Elementary Chemistry 
 
 EXPERIMENT 139. Properties of Sulfurous Acid. 
 
 Test the action of the solution of sulfur dioxicl prepared 
 in Experiment 137 on litmus paper. Cautiously taste 
 a drop of it on a stirring rod. Pour some of it into an 
 evaporating dish, add a few drops of litmus solution or 
 other indicator, neutralize with sodium hydroxid solu- 
 tion and evaporate the solution to dryness. How can 
 you prove that the white residue is the salt, sodium 
 sulfite, Na 2 SO 3 ? 
 
 Add a drop or so of potassium permanganate solu- 
 tion to a little sulfurous acid in a test tube. Repeat, 
 using potassium dichromate instead of permanganate. 
 Compare results. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 140. Properties of Sulfuric Acid. 
 Decomposition by /teat : Place not more than one drop 
 of strong sulfuric acid in a porcelain dish and heat. 
 Heat generated on mixing with water : Pour a few 
 drops of strong sulfuric acid into a test tube half filled 
 with water. Action of organic substances: Try the 
 action successively of a few drops of strong sulfuric acid 
 on (a) a splinter of wood, (/;) a piece of paper, (c) a 
 piece of colored cloth, (d) a little sugar, (c) a little 
 starch. It may be necessary to heat gently in the last 
 two cases. 
 
 PHOSPHORUS 
 
 CAUTION. All experiments with phosphorus 
 should be carried out with the utmost caution, as 
 the ready inflammability of the yellow modification 
 of the element makes such experiments dangerous. 
 The waxy modification should never be touched 
 with the fingers and should be handled and cut 
 UNDER WATER. At the conclusion of an 
 experiment all bits of phosphorus left over should 
 be carefully collected and burned. 
 
Experiments 101 
 
 EXPERIMENT 141. Physical Properties of Phos- 
 phorus. Examine both red and yellow phosphorus, 
 carefully noting their chief characteristics. Put a piece 
 (3 mm.) of yellow phosphorus in a small dry test tube 
 and add about 3 c - c - of carbon bisulfid. 
 
 CAUTION. Be sure that no flames are near. 
 
 Shake carefully for a minute or so. Pour the solu- 
 tion, every bit of if, upon two or three pieces of filter 
 paper laid on a ring of a retort stand and set the stand 
 back out of the way. 
 
 While waiting for the carbon bisulfid to evaporate, 
 put a pinch of red phosphorus in a small dry test tube, 
 add about 3 c - c - of carbon bisulfid, shake for a minute or 
 so, filter through a dry filter paper, catch the filtrate in 
 a watch glass, and allow to evaporate (in the hood). Is 
 red phosphorus soluble in carbon bisulfid ? What hap- 
 pens to the solution of yellow phosphorus poured on 
 the filter paper? How do you account for the result? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 142. Conversion of Red Phosphorus 
 into Yellow Phosphorus. Put a pinch of red phos- 
 phorus in the bottom of a small ignition tube 7 , hold the 
 tube horizontally with the tongs, and gently heat the 
 bottom of the tube. When nearly all the red phos- 
 phorus has disappeared, let the tube cool, then make a 
 scratch just below the deposit that has collected in the 
 cooler part of the tube and break the tube. Rub the 
 deposit with a glass rod or match stick. How do you 
 know that yellow phosphorus has been formed ? Do 
 not neglect to heat both parts of the tube to redness so 
 as to burn up all the phosphorus. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 143. Preparation and Properties of 
 Phosphin. Fill a test tube fitted with a two-hole cork, 
 through which pass tubes as shown in Fig. 62, about 
 one-fourth full with sodium hydroxid solution, and put 
 into it a piece (4 *) of phosphorus. Connect the tube 
 
102 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 which dips into the soda solution with the gas supply 
 and pass through the apparatus ordinary illuminating 
 gas until the air is expelled. How can you prove this 
 to be the case? Shut off the gas and gently heat the 
 
 contents of the test 
 tube, keeping the end 
 of the delivery tube 
 below water in a dish. 
 How do you account 
 for the rings of smoke 
 that appear ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 144. 
 Preparation of Me- 
 taphosphoric Acid. 
 Put a little heap of 
 red phosphorus on a 
 piece of asbestos 
 paper (or in a porce- 
 lain crucible) set in a 
 crockery plate, ignite 
 the phosphorus and 
 invert over it a perfectly dry wide-rnouthed bottle. 
 When the phosphorus ceases to burn set the bottle 
 upright. Pour a few drops of cold water on the phos- 
 phorus pentoxid formed, noting any hissing noise, and 
 test the solution with blue litmus. Put the solution 
 into a test tube and add silver nitrate solution. What 
 is the precipitate formed ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 145. Preparation of Orthophos- 
 phoric Acid. Put a little (i cm - circle) red phosphorus 
 in an evaporating dish, cover it with nitric acid, and 
 heat gently. When the action has ceased, filter, if the 
 solution is not clear, and evaporate the filtrate on the 
 water bath. Redissolve the sirup which remains in a 
 little water. What is its action on blue litmus paper? 
 
 FlG. 62 CONVENIENT APPARATUS FOR PRE- 
 PARING PHOSPHIN 
 
Experimen ts 103 
 
 Add silver nitrate solution and note nature of the pre- 
 cipitate of silver orthophosphate, Ag 3 PO 4 . If the pre- 
 cipitate is of a dark color, it is evident that some phos- 
 phorus acid was formed also. In that case it is well 
 to add silver nitrate solution to a solution of commercial 
 orthophosphoric acid. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 146. Reactions of Phosphates. To 
 a solution of sodium hydrogen phosphate, Na 2 HPO 4 , 
 add some calcium chlorid, CaCl 2 , solution. The pre- 
 cipitate is secondary calcium phosphate, CaHPO 4 . 
 
 Prepare some "magnesia mixture" by mixing a little 
 ammonia hydroxid and ammonium chlorid with magne- 
 sium sulfate, and add it to a solution of acid sodium 
 phosphate. The precipitate is magnesium ammonium 
 phosphate, (NH 4 )MgPO 4 . 
 
 ARSENIC AND ANTIMONY 
 
 EXPERIMENT 147. Properties of Arsenic. Note 
 the physical properties of arsenic. In what respects 
 does it resemble metals? Heat a small particle of the 
 element on a porcelain crucible cover, noting particu- 
 larly any odor. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 148. Arsin. {Marsh's Test for Arsenic.) 
 Generate hydrogen in a generator provided with a long 
 ( 2 5 cm ') glass delivery tube drawn out to a jet. Use 
 none but chemically pure materials. When the air is 
 displaced, light the hydrogen at the tip. Heat the glass 
 tube nearest the generator with a Bunsen flame. If a 
 deposit appears in the cold part of the tube, the zinc or 
 sulfuric acid is impure and the experiment should be 
 discontinued and other materials used. If no subli- 
 mate appears and the hydrogen burns with colorless or 
 slightly yellow flame, and leaves no spot on the bottom 
 of a porcelain dish pressed down upon it an instant, 
 pour a few drops of an arsenical solution down the 
 
IO4 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 funnel tube. Heat the tube and note the appearance 
 of sublimate and the color of hydrogen flame. Press 
 the porcelain dish in the flame a moment and add 
 a couple of drops of sodium hypochlorite solution to 
 the spot. 
 
 Soak pieces of green paper in water and test the 
 water for arsenic as above. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 149. Arsenic Trioxid, Trichlorid, 
 and Trisulfid. (a) Mix a pinch of arsenic trioxid 
 with an equal bulk of powdered charcoal, put the 
 mixture in an ignition tube, and slip down over it a 
 loosely fitting plug of charcoal. With the tongs hold 
 the tube in a flame so as to keep the charcoal plug red- 
 hot while heating the mixture of charcoal and oxid. 
 What is the nature of the deposit that forms in the 
 cooler part of the tube ? How can you prove this 
 deposit to be arsenic ? 
 
 (b) Heat carefully a pinch of arsenic trioxid with 
 sodium hydroxid solution. Sodium arsenite, Na 2 AsO 3 , 
 is formed. 
 
 (c) Boil a little of the trioxid with concentrated 
 hydrochloric acid. Result ? Dilute with an equal vol- 
 ume of water. Arsenic trichlorid is formed. 
 
 (d) Pass hydrogen sulfid into the solution from (c). 
 What is the color and appearance of the precipitate ? 
 Let the precipitate settle, pour off the supernatant 
 liquid, add some ammonium sulfid to the residue, warm 
 gently, and shake well for some time. 
 
 Soluble ammonium sulfo-arsenite, ( ) 2 AsS 3 , is 
 formed. To a little of this solution add a slight excess 
 of hydrochloric acid. What happens ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 150. Arsenic Acid. Boil a little 
 arsenic with nitric acid for some time, then add just 
 enough ammonium hydroxid to effect neutralization. 
 To part of this solution add silver nitrate solution, and 
 
Experiments 105 
 
 to another, "magnesia mixture." Compare results with 
 those obtained in Experiment 146. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 151. Properties of Antimony. Note 
 the physical properties of various samples of antimony 
 that may be available. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 152. Stibin. Follow the directions 
 in Experiment 148, substituting antimony trichlorid 
 (Experiment 153) for the arsenical solution. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 153. Antimony Trioxid, Trichlorid, 
 and Trisulfid. (a) Repeat Experiment 149 (a), substi- 
 tuting antimony trioxid for arsenic trioxid, and com- 
 pare results. 
 
 (b) Boil a little powdered antimony with sodium 
 hydroxid solution and compare results with those 
 obtained in Experiment 149 (#). 
 
 (c) Place some powdered antimony in a test tube 
 and add about 3 c - c - of concentrated hydrochloric acid 
 and one cubic centimeter of concentrated nitric acid. 
 If a reaction does not start promptly, warm a little, and 
 let it continue for at least ten minutes. Then dilute 
 with five times its bulk of water and, if the solution is 
 not clear, filter it. Pass hydrogen sulfid into the solu- 
 tion of antimony trichlorid thus prepared. If a precip- 
 itate does not soon form, add more water. Treat the 
 precipitate of antimony trisulfid, Sb 2 S 3 , as directed in 
 Experiment 149 (c) and (d). 
 
 (d) Heat some powdered antimony with concen- 
 trated nitric acid and compare results with those 
 obtained in Experiment 150. 
 
 BISMUTH 
 
 EXPERIMENT 154. Properties of Bismuth. Note 
 the physical properties of bismuth. Try to dissolve a 
 bit of it in (i) concentrated hydrochloric and (2) con- 
 centrated nitric acid. 
 
io6 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 EXPERIMENT 155. Reactions of Salts of Bismuth. 
 
 Place a few small crystals of bismuth nitrate in a test 
 tube, fill the tube a quarter full with water, and add 
 small amounts of concentrated hydrochloric acid until 
 a clear solution is obtained. Pour a few drops of the 
 solution into water, nearly filling- a test tube. The 
 white precipitate is bismuth subnitrate, BiONO 3 . Pass 
 hydrogen sulfid through the rest of the solution. Filter 
 out the bismuth sulfid, Bi 2 S 3 , and treat with warm yel- 
 low ammonium sulfid. Filter and acidify the filtrate 
 with hydrochloric acid. Compare the result with Ex- 
 periments 149 (d) and 153 (c). How can sulfid of bis- 
 muth be separated from those of arsenic and antimony ? 
 
 MAGNESIUM 
 
 EXPERIMENT 156. Properties of Magnesium. 
 
 Scrape a piece of magnesium wire or ribbon bright and 
 note its most obvious physical properties. Grasp one 
 end of a short piece with tongs and hold it in a Bunsen 
 flame. What is the product and what are its properties ? 
 Treat a little magnesium in a test tube with dilute 
 hydrochloric or sulfuric acid. What gas is evolved? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 157. Reactions of Magnesium Salts. 
 To a little magnesium sulfate solution add sodium or 
 ammonium carbonate solution. Also add sodium or 
 ammonium carbonate solution to magnesium chlorid 
 solution. Compare results. What are the products? 
 
 To about 5 c - c - of magnesium sulfate solution add 
 about one cubic centimeter each of ammonium hydroxid 
 and ammonium chlorid solution. Then add disodium 
 hydrogen phosphate solution. The precipitate is mag- 
 nesium ammonium phosphate (NH 4 )MgPO 4 . 
 
 EXPERIMENT 158. Preparation of Magnesium 
 Sulfate. Place about 20 #- of magnesite in a beaker 
 or flask and add 30 to 40 c - c - of dilute sulfuric acid. If 
 
Experiments 107 
 
 effervescence is not vigorous, heat a little. When solu- 
 tion is complete, filter and evaporate the filtrate to 
 crystallization on a water bath. Pour off the mother 
 liquor from the crystals and dry them by pressing 
 between folds of filter paper. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 159. Preparation and Properties of 
 Calcium Oxid (Lime) and Hydroxid (Slaked Lime). 
 Test a piece of marble (12 mm -) with wet red litmus 
 paper. What reaction does it show ? Support the lump 
 on a frame of iron wire laid across a ring of a stand, 
 and heat as hot as possible, using two Bunsen flames, 
 or, better, a blast lamp. After heating for about fifteen 
 minutes remove the flames, and as soon as the lump is 
 cold, test it again with wet red litmus paper. What 
 change has supervened ? 
 
 Place the lump of quicklime in a dish or saucer and 
 pour water upon it drop by drop as long as it is taken 
 up readily. Do not .add too much water. Keep the 
 lump under observation for some time, and note any 
 changes (heat, volume, appearance). 
 
 Put some of this slaked lime in a bottle and fill the 
 bottle with distilled water. Shake up well, let settle, 
 and decant the clear liquid into another bottle, and 
 label it "Lime Water." 
 
 EXPERIMENT 160. Some Properties of Several 
 Calcium Compounds. Review Experiment 67. Place 
 a piece of old mortar in a test tube, add dilute hydro- 
 chloric acid, and identify the gas. 
 
 Stir up some (5 cm - circle) plaster of Paris with 
 enough water to make a thick paste. Spread the paste 
 on a piece of paper and lay on it a coin covered with a 
 thin coating of vaseline, embedding it slightly in the 
 paste. (Do not delay to wash out the dish, as the 
 plaster of Paris is hard to remove after it has set.) 
 Carefully remove the coin after the plaster has set for 
 
io8 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 an hour or more. To about 2 c - c - of a solution of calcium 
 salt (chloric! or nitrate) add ammonium or sodium car- 
 bonate solution. Repeat, using ammonium oxalate 
 solution instead of a carbonate solution. 
 
 Try the flame test (Experiment 127) with (i) cal- 
 cium chlorid and (2) calcium sulfate. 
 
 Review Experiment 38 for water of crystallization 
 of gypsum. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 161. Reactions of Strontium and 
 Barium Salts, (a) To a little strontium chlorid solu- 
 tion in a test tube add a few drops of ammonium car- 
 bonate solution. Also ascertain the reaction between 
 a solution of strontium chlorid and dilute sulfuric acid. 
 
 (I?) Test solutions of barium chlorid with ammonium 
 carbonate and dilute sulfuric acid. Try the flame tests, 
 using (i) strontium chlorid, (2) strontium nitrate, (3) 
 barium chlorid, and (4) barium nitrate. Look at the 
 flames through a spectroscope or through a diffraction 
 grating, if these instruments are at hand. 
 
 BORON AND SILICON 
 
 EXPERIMENT 162. Preparation of Boric Acid. 
 
 Put about 2$#- (7 cm - circle) of borax in a beaker and 
 add about ioo c - c - of water. Heat and stir until the 
 borax is all dissolved ; filter if the solution is not clear. 
 To the hot solution add enough strong hydrochloric 
 acid to make it decidedly acid to litmus paper. Allow 
 the solution to cool and stand for some time. Then 
 filter off the boric acid crystals which have formed, and 
 purify them by recrystallization from the smallest pos- 
 sible amount of boiling water. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 163. Characteristic Reaction of 
 Boron Compounds. Dissolve a pinch of boric acid 
 in about 2 c - c - of strong alcohol contained in an evapo- 
 rating dish. Dip a tuft of asbestos into the solution 
 
Experiments 109 
 
 and, holding it with tongs, set the alcohol on fire. What 
 is the color of the name ? Ignite the rest of the solu- 
 tion in the dish. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 164. Borax Bead. Make a small (less 
 than a millimeter in diameter) loop at the end of a piece 
 of platinum wire by winding it around the point of a 
 lead pencil. Heat it and touch it to a small lump (2 **) 
 of borax. Then heat the borax until a clear, glass-like 
 bead is obtained in the loop. Bring the hot bead in con- 
 tact with a minute particle of some cobalt or iron com- 
 pound and heat in the flame. What color is imparted 
 to the bead ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 165. Preparation of Magnesium Sil- 
 icid and of Silicon Hydrid. Mix well on a piece of 
 paper equal parts (2 cm - circle) of powdered magnesium 
 and very fine sand, place the mixture in a small test 
 tube and, grasping it with a test tube holder or paper 
 and tongs, with its mouth pointing so that any of 
 the substance which may be projected from the tube 
 can do no harm, hold it steadily in the tip of a Bunsen 
 flame. After the completion of the reaction break the 
 test tube and throw small portions of the product (mag- 
 nesium silicid) into dilute hydrochloric acid contained in 
 an evaporating dish or beaker. What takes place ? What 
 compound of silicon is spontaneously inflammable ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 166. Preparation of Silicic Acids. 
 To about 5 c - c - of a concentrated solution of " water 
 glass " (a crude mixture of sodium and potassium sili- 
 cates) add in small proportions hydrochloric acid until 
 the mixture is strongly acid to litmus paper. Put a 
 little of the thick, gelatinous mass (a mixture of ortho- 
 silicic and metasilicic acids) on a piece of platinum foil, 
 evaporate to dryness, and heat strongly. Add a drop 
 of water to the white residue, and test it with litmus 
 paper. What is the powder ? 
 
no Elementary Chemistry 
 
 ZINC 
 
 EXPERIMENT 167. Properties of Zinc. Ascertain 
 the most obvious characteristics of as many different 
 forms (mossy, granulated, powdered, stick) of zinc as 
 possible. Review Experiments 18 and 104. In Experi- 
 ment 1 8 hydrogen and zinc chlorid were formed ; in 
 Experiment 104 hydrogen and sodium zincate. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 168. Reactions of Zinc Salts, (a) 
 Fill a test tube about a fourth full of zinc sulfate or 
 chlorid solution and add a drop or two of sodium 
 hydroxid solution. What is the precipitate formed ? 
 Now add little by little enough sodium hydroxid solu- 
 tion to redissolve the precipitate formed at first. The 
 alkalin solution contains sodium zincate. 
 
 (b) Fill a test tube about a third full of zinc sulfate 
 solution and add a drop of dilute hydrochloric acid. 
 What is the reaction of the mixture (litmus) ? Pass in 
 hydrogen sulfid for a few minutes. Result ? No\v 
 transfer the mixture to a beaker and add half its vol- 
 ume of ammonium sulfid. The precipitate is zinc sul- 
 fid. Test with litmus. What must the reaction of a 
 zinc salt solution be in order that the sulfid may be 
 precipitated ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 169. Blowpipe Reactions. Heat a 
 small piece of zinc on charcoal in the oxidizing flame 
 of a blowpipe. Moisten the incrustation with a drop 
 of cobalt nitrate solution and heat again in the oxid- 
 izing flame. Result? 
 
 CADMIUM 
 
 EXPERIMENT 170. Properties and Reactions. 
 Examine a piece of the cadmium, and note its most 
 obvious properties. 
 
 Into a dilute solution of cadmium chlorid or sulfate 
 pass hydrogen sulfid gas. The precipitate which forms 
 
Experiments 1 1 1 
 
 is cadmium sulfid, CdS. Make the solution acid by 
 adding a few drops of hydrochloric acid. Is cadmium 
 sulfid soluble in dilute hydrochloric acid ? 
 
 Wash the precipitate by decantation and add ammo- 
 nium sulfid solution. Is the precipitate redissolved? 
 How can cadmium sulfid be distinguished from other 
 yellow sulfids? 
 
 Add sodium hydroxid solution in excess to a solution 
 of a cadmium salt. Is the hydroxid precipitated solu- 
 ble in caustic alkali solution? 
 
 MERCURY 
 
 EXPERIMENT 171. Preparation of Mercury. Put 
 
 a little cinnabar near one end of a glass tube (15"*- 
 long) open at both ends, and heat the glass under the 
 cinnabar strongly, holding the tube in a slanting posi- 
 tion and rotating it constantly. What gaseous products 
 are formed? What is deposited in the cooler part of 
 the tube ? 
 
 Mix a pinch of mercury chlorid with two or three 
 times its bulk of dry powdered sodium carbonate, and 
 heat the mixture in an ignition tube. Note the nature 
 of the sublimate. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 172. Mercurous Nitrate. Fill the 
 rounded end of a test tube nearly full of mercury, add 
 about 5 c - c - of water, and then about $ c - c - of concentrated 
 nitric acid. Let the action go on for an hour or so. 
 In the meantime perform Experiment 173. Pour the 
 contents of the tube off from any mercury that is left 
 into a small beaker, dissolve in the least possible amount 
 of water any crystals which may have formed, rinse out 
 the tube with about 2O C - C - of water, put the rinse water 
 into the beaker, and add one or two drops of concen- 
 trated nitric acid, so as to have a clear solution. Save 
 the solution for Experiment 174. 
 
H2 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 EXPERIMENT 173. Mercuric Nitrate. Dissolve 
 about half as much mercury as was used in Experiment 
 172 in about io c - c - of concentrated nitric acid. Dilute 
 the solution of mercuric nitrate thus formed with an 
 equal volume of water. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 174. Reactions of Mercurous Salts. 
 To 2 c - c - of mercurous nitrate solution add hydrogen 
 sulfid. The precipitate is a mixture of mercuric sulfid 
 and mercury. Add to separate portions of the solu- 
 tion, hydrochloric acid and potassium iodid solution, 
 respectively. Add ammonium hydroxid to the precipi- 
 tate from hydrochloric acid. What are the precipitates ? 
 Put a strip of zinc and of copper (or copper wire) into 
 portions of the mercurous nitrate solution. In a few 
 minutes remove them and rub them dry. What has 
 happened ? Rub a cent or a dime with a piece of paper' 
 wet with mercurous nitrate solution. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 175. Reactions of Mercuric Salts. 
 Pass hydrogen sulfid into the mercuric nitrate solution. 
 The precipitate is mercuric sulfid, HgS. Add to sepa- 
 rate portions of mercuric nitrate solution, hydrochloric 
 acid and potassium io^id solution (this drop by drop). 
 What are the precipitates ? 
 
 ALUMINUM 
 
 EXPERIMENT 1 76. Properties of Aluminum. Exam- 
 ine as many different forms of aluminum as are avail- 
 able, also of its alloys ; note their most prominent 
 physical features. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 177. Action of Acids and Alkalis on 
 Aluminum. Fill the rounded end of a test tube with 
 aluminum, add about twice its volume of concentrated 
 hydrochloric acid, and warm and test the gas evolved. 
 
 Repeat, using sodium hydroxid solution (cf. Experi- 
 ment 27). The solution contains sodium aluminate. 
 
Experiments 113 
 
 EXPERIMENT 178. Action of Mordants. Soak a 
 piece of white cotton cloth in a strong solution of cochi- 
 neal or indigo for a minute or so ; then wring it out and 
 dry it. Try to wash out the color, using soap. Dip a 
 similar piece of cloth in a solution of aluminum acetate 
 and dry it. Then soak it in the cochineal or indigo 
 solution and dry it. Try to wash out its color. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 179. Alums. Weigh out to a decigram 
 quantities of aluminum sulfate, A1 2 (SO 4 ) 3 -(- i8H 2 O, 
 and potassium sulfate, K 2 SO 4 , in the ratio of their 
 molecular weights, i. e. 770 : 137. Fifteen grams of the 
 first salt to 3 grams of the last are good working quan- 
 tities. Dissolve each in the smallest possible quantity 
 of boiling water in a test tube. Mix the two solutions 
 hot in an evaporating dish and set aside to cool and crys- 
 tallize. Note taste and form of crystals, 
 
 Mix equal volumes of solutions of aluminum sul- 
 fate and ammonium sulfate saturated at the boiling 
 temperature. Set aside to crystallize. The product is 
 ammonium alum. 
 
 NOTE. Large crystals may be obtained by hanging a thread 
 or string in the solution. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 180. Reactions of Aluminum Com- 
 pounds. Add a dilute solution of sodium carbonate 
 to a dilute solution of alum. Filter the precipitate and 
 wash it thoroughly. Transfer to a test tube, cover it 
 with water, and add -hydrochloric acid. If the precipi- 
 tate is a carbonate, there will be effervescence. Add 
 ammonium sulfid solution to a solution of alum. Filter 
 and wash the precipitate and, placing it in a test tube, 
 add hydrochloric acid. If the precipitate is a sulfid, 
 hydrogen sulfid gas will be evolved. 
 
 To some aluminum sulfate solution in a test tube 
 add about one-fifth as much sodium hydroxid. Transfer 
 
114 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 about half of the precipitate of aluminum hydroxid, 
 A1(OH) 3 , thus formed to another test tube, and add 
 an excess of sodium hydroxid. Sodium aluminate is 
 formed. Is it soluble ? To the other half of the pre- 
 cipitate add dilute hydrochloric acid. Compare results 
 with those obtained for zinc in Experiment 168. 
 
 TIN 
 
 EXPERIMENT 181. Physical Properties. Examine 
 a stick of tin and a piece of tin foil, and note the physical 
 properties of the metal. Bend a stick of tin when held 
 close to the ear. What information does your sense of 
 hearing give you in regard to tin ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 182. Crystallization of Tin. Hold- 
 ing a piece of tinplate by means of tongs, heat it in a 
 flame until the tin coating commences to melt. Then 
 immediately plunge it into cold water. Rub it over 
 with a piece of filter paper wet with dilute aqua regia, 
 then with paper wet with a solution of a caustic alkali. 
 Note the crystalline figures brought out by the action 
 of the solvents. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 183. Action of Acids on Tin. Fill 
 the rounded end of a test tube with granulated tin, and 
 add enough concentrated hydrochloric acid to fill the 
 test tube about a sixth full. Heat gently (in the hood) 
 until effervescence commences and regulate the heat- 
 ing so as to cause the hydrogen to be given off rapidly. 
 When the action is about at an end, fill the test tube 
 full of water, and save the solution of stannous chlorid 
 thus formed for Experiments 184, 185, and 186. Put a 
 small piece of tin in a test tube and add a little concen- 
 trated nitric acid. As soon as the reaction begins set 
 the tube in a bottle in the hood. The white product is 
 metastannic acid. Heat a little tin with strong sulfuric 
 acid in a test tube. Result ? 
 
Experiments 1 1 5 
 
 EXPERIMENT 184. Preparation of a Solution of 
 Stannic Chlorid. Fill a small test tube about a sixth 
 full of the stannous chlorid solution prepared in Experi- 
 ment 183, and add a little aqua regia, or add bromin in 
 small portions until its color ceases to be discharged, 
 and boil to expel the excess of acid or bromin. What 
 is the action of the aqua regia or the bromin ? Preserve 
 the solution for use in Experiment 185. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 185. Distinction Between Stannous 
 and Stannic Salts, (a] To a little of the stannous 
 chlorid solution prepared in Experiment 183 add a few 
 drops of mercuric chlorid solution. Note the white 
 precipitate of mercurous chlorid, HgCl. Add more of 
 the mercuric solution and heat gently. The gray tinge 
 imparted to the precipitate is due to mercury resulting 
 from the reduction of the mercurous chlorid. 
 
 (b) Add a few drops of mercuric chlorid solution 
 to some of the stannic chlorid solution prepared in 
 Experiment 184. What is the result? 
 
 (c) Saturate with hydrogen sulfid (i) a little of the 
 stannous chlorid solution, and (2) of the stannic chlorid 
 solution, and compare results. 
 
 (it) Neutralize the contents of each of the test 
 tubes with ammonium hydroxid and add yellow ammo- 
 nium sulfid. Shake up the mixtures in each case and 
 compare results. 
 
 Take fresh portions of the solutions of stannous and 
 stannic chlorid, and add to each sodium hydroxid 
 solution, a drop or two at a time. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 186. Replacement of Tin by Zinc. 
 Fill a test tube about one-fourth full of the stannous 
 chlorid solution prepared in Experiment 183, and fill up 
 with water. Put a narrow strip of sheet zinc in this 
 diluted solution and examine after a little while. What 
 is the appearance of the zinc ? 
 
 9 
 
1 1 6 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 EXPERIMENT 187. (Quantitative.'] (Hood.) To 
 Determine the Equivalent of Tin. Weigh about 
 5.00^- of tin foil in an evaporating dish. Put most of 
 it on a piece of paper and moisten what is left in the 
 dish with strong nitric acid. When the action slackens, 
 put a little more foil into the dish and then a little 
 more acid. Use as little acid as possible, but be sure 
 that all the tin is attacked and that there is no loss of 
 metal from spattering. 
 
 Cautiously evaporate to dryness with free flame, and 
 finally heat as hot as possible for at least ten minutes. 
 Weigh when it is cool, and after moistening with the 
 acid heat again ; continue in this way until the weight 
 remains practically unchanged. 
 
 The product is a compound of oxygen. Taking the equivalent 
 of oxygen as 7.94, calculate that of tin. If tin is quadrivalent 
 in this compound, what is its atomic weight ? The specific heat 
 of tin is 0.056 ; what is its atomic weight as deduced by Dulong 
 and Petit's Rule ? 
 
 LEAD 
 EXPERIMENT 188. Physical Properties of Lead. 
 
 Examine as many different samples of lead as possible. 
 Cut a piece of lead with a knife and note appearance 
 of freshly cut surface. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 189. Deposition of Lead by Zinc. 
 Fill a test tube nearly full of a solution of lead acetate 
 (about 10 per cent) and put in it a narrow strip of 
 sheet zinc. Examine after an hour or so. Pour off a 
 little of the solution and test it for zinc. 
 
 To remove the lead that may still be present add 
 dilute sulfuric acid to the solution. As lead sulfate is 
 not wholly insoluble in water, add an equal bulk of 
 alcohol, in which the sulfate is quite insoluble. Filter 
 off the lead sulfate, neutralize the filtrate with ammo- 
 nium hydroxid, and add ammonium sulfid ; a white pre- 
 cipitate of zinc sulfid results. In case all the lead has 
 
Experiments 117 
 
 not been removed from solution by sulfuric acid, the 
 precipitate caused by ammonium sulfid will not be 
 white, but more or less of a blackish color, depending 
 tipon the amount of lead sulfid also precipitated. Hy- 
 drogen sulfid is a better precipitant of lead than sulfuric 
 acid, and it is possible to remove all the lead by its use. 
 Acidify the solution with hydrochloric acid, pass hydro- 
 gen sulfid through it, filter, and add ammonium hydroxid 
 and then ammonium sulfid. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 190. Action of Acids on Lead. 
 Scrape three small pieces of lead bright and clean, 
 place them in test tubes and cover with (i) nitric, (2) 
 hydrochloric, and (3) sulfuric acid. If no action takes 
 place promptly, heat to boiling. Note the nature of 
 any gaseous products and change in the appearance of 
 the lead. If the lead dissolves in any of the acids, let 
 the action continue to completion, pour out the solution 
 into an evaporating dish, and set aside to crystallize. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 191. Preparation and Properties of 
 Lead Monoxid. Heat on charcoal in the oxidizing 
 flame of a blowpipe a very small bit of lead, and note 
 any vapors and incrustation formed on the charcoal. 
 Examine some litharge as to its physical properties and 
 test its solubility in nitric, acetic, sulfuric, and hydro- 
 chloric acids, both cold and hot. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 192. Preparation and Properties of 
 Red Lead. Mix about 2&- (2 cm - circle) of lead mon- 
 oxid with about 0.5^- (2 cm - circle) of powdered potas- 
 sium chlorate or nitrate, and heat the mixture in an 
 iron spoon or dish. Note the physical properties of the 
 product and compare it with other samples of red lead. 
 Ascertain in what common acids red lead is soluble. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 193. Preparation and Properties of 
 Lead Dioxid. Place about 2 s- (2 cm - circle) of red lead 
 in a test tube, add some dilute nitric acid, and heat to 
 
iiS Elementary Chemistry 
 
 boiling for several minutes. Filter and wash the brown 
 residue. Put a little of it in a test tube, add concen- 
 trated hydrochloric acid, and heat gently. What gas 
 is evolved ? What other peroxid behaves with hydro- 
 chloric acid in a similar manner? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 194. Reactions of Lead Salts. Put 
 a little dilute solution of lead nitrate or acetate in six 
 separate test tubes and add to one of each the follow- 
 ing reagents, noting the nature of the precipitates : 
 
 (1) Hydrogen sulfid. 
 
 (2) Hydrochloric acid. Add several times as much 
 water and heat to boiling. What change ? Cool by 
 holding test tube in running^ water. What is the nature 
 of the product ? 
 
 (3) Sulfuric acid. 
 
 (4) Potassium iodid solution. 
 
 (5) Potassium dichromate solution. 
 
 (6) Sodium hydroxid solution gradually and in 
 small portions until in excess. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 195. Action of Water on Lead. Fill 
 a flask half full of water and bubble the breath through 
 it for some time so as to charge the water with carbon 
 dioxid. Scrape a piece of lead bright and clean, put it 
 in the flask, cork, and let stand for a day or so. Then 
 test portions of the water for lead by Experiment 189. 
 If no lead is found to be present, let the lead act on the 
 water for a day or so longer, or evaporate off most of the 
 water and test again. Bear in mind that the lead which 
 has dissolved may be so slight that the precipitate of 
 lead sulfid may be so minute as merely to tinge the 
 liquid brown. 
 
 COPPER 
 
 EXPERIMENT 196. Properties of Copper. Examine 
 as many different forms of copper as are procurable ; 
 note their most prominent characteristics. File a piece 
 
Experiments 119 
 
 of copper wire bright and heat it red hot. What is the 
 black coating? Compare with Experiments 22 and no. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 197. Precipitate of Copper. Hang 
 a strip of zinc (scraped clean) in a neutral solution of 
 copper sulfate ; also in another test tube containing 
 copper sulfate solution suspend an iron nail filed bright. 
 What soon occurs ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 198. Preparation and Properties of 
 Cuprous Oxid. Dissolve 2 & of copper sulfate in 30 c - c - 
 of water and add 10^- of Rochelle salt (sodium potas- 
 sium tartrate) previously dissolved in 20 c - c - of water. 
 Warm and filter. To the filtrate add IQC.C. o f a dilute 
 solution of grape sugar, and then enough sodium 
 hydroxid solution to dissolve any precipitate, and as 
 much again, so as to make the solution strongly alka- 
 lin. Boil gently until a decided change occurs. Filter 
 off the cuprous oxid, Cu 2 O, formed, dry it, and compare 
 with cupric oxid, CuO. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 199. Reactions of Copper Salts. To 
 a little copper sulfate add ammonium hydroxid in excess. 
 Then repeat with sodium hydroxid instead of ammo- 
 nium hydroxid. Heat a solution of copper sulfate to 
 boiling and add sodium hydroxid. This precipitate is 
 cupric oxid, CuO. 
 
 Review Experiment 136 for the action of hydrogen 
 sulfid on solutions of copper salts. 
 
 Review Experiment 37 for water of crystallization in 
 copper sulfate crystals. 
 
 Dip a copper or platinum wire into copper sulfate 
 solution, then take it out and heat it in a Bunsen flame; 
 note the color imparted. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 200. (Quantitative.) To Find the 
 Equivalent of Copper. Clean some copper foil or 
 wire with emery paper so that it is bright, and weigh 
 to centigrams 3^- of it. Place the weighed copper in a 
 
I2O Elementary Chemistry 
 
 small flask, barely cover it with water, and add concen- 
 trated nitric acid in small portions, allowing plenty of 
 time for the action to cease before adding a fresh por- 
 tion. When solution is complete, transfer the liquid to 
 a weighed evaporating dish, being careful not to lose 
 any, and rinse out the flask two or three times with 
 ^c.c. O f W ater, adding the rinsings to the dish. 
 
 Cautiously evaporate to dryncss. The blue com- 
 pound is copper nitrate, Cu(NO 3 ) 2 , which, when heated 
 to a high temperature, decomposes into nitric oxid, oxy- 
 gen, and copper oxid, CuO. Heat for at least ten min- 
 utes as hot as possible even after the decomposition has 
 seemed complete and then weigh the copper oxid. Heat 
 again and so on to constant weight. The equivalent of 
 oxygen is 7.94; find that of copper. Copper is bivalent 
 in this compound. What then is its atomic weight ? 
 
 SILVER 
 
 EXPERIMENT 201. Preparation and Properties of 
 Silver. I. Fill an evaporating dish a third full of sil- 
 ver nitrate solution, and introduce a few globules of 
 mercury. Set the dish aside in a safe place for a couple 
 of days. The silver will then be found forming little 
 crystals, usually attached to the mercury. Remove them 
 with steel forceps and, after washing them well, put 
 them in a bottle labeled " Silver." 
 
 II. Pour concentrated nitric acid over a ten-cent 
 piece in an evaporating dish or beaker, and when the 
 action slackens, add more acid. Toward the last, heat 
 may be applied. Add three or four times its volume of 
 water and then hydrochloric acid until all the silver is 
 removed as silver chlorid, AgCl. Let this precipitate 
 settle and wash by clecantation several times. Then 
 filter and wash free from an acid reaction. Divide it 
 into two equal parts with a knife or spatula. 
 
Experiments \ 2 1 
 
 Place one part in a dish, cover with dilute sulfuric 
 acid, and add a piece of zinc. The silver which collects 
 as a gray powder is to be separated from the zinc, 
 washed and dried. It is then to be placed in a hollow 
 excavation in a piece of charcoal and heated with a 
 blowpipe until it fuses into a globule. 
 
 Place the second part in a cavity in a piece of char- 
 coal, cover it with sodium carbonate, and reduce it with 
 a blowpipe flame. Scrape the minute globules together 
 and fuse them together into a single bead. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 202. Reactions of Silver Salts, (a) 
 Add a soluble chlorid solution, such as HC1 or NaCl, 
 to a solution of silver nitrate. Boil, filter, and expose 
 the silver chlorid to sunlight. Result ? 
 
 (b) Add a potassium bromid solution to a solution 
 of silver nitrate. Heat to boiling, filter, and separate 
 the precipitate into two parts. To one add sodium 
 thiosulfate solution, Na 2 S 2 O 3 . Result? Expose the 
 other half to light. Result ? 
 
 (c) Add potassium iodid solution to silver nitrate 
 solution. Compare the properties of the precipitate 
 with those of silver chlorid and bromid obtained in (a) 
 and (b). 
 
 IRON 
 
 EXPERIMENT 203. Properties of Iron. Examine 
 as many different forms as possible of the varieties of 
 iron, note their most obvious physical properties, and 
 try the action of a magnet on each. Which becomes 
 permanently magnetized ? Introduce a pinch of iron 
 powder into a Bunsen flame. What happens ? Review 
 Experiments 7, I. (;/*); 25, 27, 28, and 51. 
 
 To get "clean" ferrous reactions the ferrous solution 
 must not be given a chance to oxidize. If the hydro- 
 chloric acid solution be poured directly from the test 
 tube while hydrogen is still being evolved, there is no 
 
122 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 danger of any ferric chlorid being present. Solutions 
 of ferrous sulfate prepared from the crystals nearly 
 always oxidize a little so that the true ferrous reaction 
 is obscured by the ferric reaction. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 204. Reactions of Ferrous Salts. 
 Fill a test tube about a fifth full of iron (filings or small 
 brads), add enough dilute hydrochloric acid to fill the 
 test tube nearly half full, and warm, if necessary, to 
 start the reaction. By appropriate tests identify the 
 gas given off. Ferrous chlorid is formed in solution. 
 
 (a) As soon as the action has almost ceased, pour a 
 little of the solution into some sodium or ammonium 
 hydroxid solution. Note the changes of color in the 
 precipitate of ferrous hydroxid produced. To what 
 are they due ? 
 
 (l>) Add a little of the ferrous chlorid solution to a 
 solution of potassium ferricyanid, and note nature of 
 the precipitate of ferrous ferricyanid (Turnbull's blue). 
 
 (<r) Add a third portion of the chlorid to potassium 
 ferrocyanid solution. Result ? 
 
 (d) Add a fourth portion to potassium sulfocya- 
 nate solution, KCNS. Result ? Save what ferrous 
 chlorid is left for Experiment 205. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 205. Reactions of Ferric Salts. Add 
 more hydrochloric acid to the iron used in Experiment 
 204 and, after the reaction has almost ceased, filter the 
 solution into a beaker and add 2 c - c - of concentrated 
 nitric acid. Boil for a few minutes and note any change 
 of color. The solution now contains ferric chlorid as 
 well as ferric nitrate. 
 
 To ascertain whether the conversion of the ferrous 
 into the ferric state is complete or not, put a few drops 
 in a test tube and add a little potassium ferrocyanid. If 
 a blue precipitate is formed, add one cubic centimeter 
 more nitric acid and boil again. Put a little of this ferric 
 
Experiments 
 
 123 
 
 solution into each of four test tubes and add the four 
 reagents used in Experiment 204. Tabulate the results 
 of Experiments 204 and 205 as follows : 
 
 
 Ferrous 
 
 Salt 
 
 Ferric 
 
 Salt 
 
 REAGENT 
 
 Precipitate or 
 Solution 
 
 Color 
 
 Precipitate or 
 Solution 
 
 Color 
 
 NaOH .. . 
 
 
 
 
 
 K 3 Fe(CN) 6 __ 
 
 
 
 
 
 K 4 Fe(CN) R 
 
 
 
 
 
 KCNS.... 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 How may a ferrous salt be distinguished from a 
 ferric ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 206. Oxidation of Ferrous Salts. 
 
 Place a clear crystal or so of ferrous sulfate in a test 
 tube and fill the tube half full of water. Shake the 
 tube until the crystal has dissolved. 
 
 (a] Put half of the solution into another test tube, 
 add a little hydrochloric acid, warm somewhat, and add 
 a few crystals of potassium chlorate. Heat to boiling 
 and test for a ferric and a ferrous salt. 
 
 (b) To the rest of the ferrous sulfate solution add 
 a little sulfuric acid, heat to boiling, then run in drop 
 by drop an equal volume of concentrated nitric acid 
 and boil for a few minutes. Test portions of the result- 
 ing solution for the presence of ferric and ferrous salts. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 207. Reduction of Ferric Salts. To 
 a solution of ferric chlorid add a little hydrochloric 
 acid and drop in some iron so as to give a good evolu- 
 tion of hydrogen. Add more acid, if necessary, to keep 
 up the action for at least a quarter of an hour, then 
 test a little of the solution for the presence of a ferrous 
 compound. If the test is not decisive, continue the 
 reduction until it is ; be sure that hydrogen is given off 
 copiously. 
 
124 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 EXPERIMENT 208. Manufacture of Ink. Mix a 
 
 strong solution of ferrous sulfate with a little of a solu- 
 tion of powdered nutgalls. What is the color of the 
 mixture ? Does it deepen on standing for a few min- 
 utes ? Dip a pen into it and see how it writes. To a 
 small portion of the ink add some oxalic acid solution. 
 What good method does the result suggest in regard to 
 removing ink stains ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 209. Borax Bead Test for Iron. 
 Touch a hot borax bead (Experiment 164) to some iron 
 compound so that a small portion is taken up by it, and 
 heat in the oxidizing flame of a blowpipe until the 
 bead is colored a decided^ yellow. Then heat it in the 
 reducing flame until it becomes green. 
 
 NICKEL 
 
 EXPERIMENT 210. Reactions of Nickel Salts. 
 
 Make the following tests on a dilute solution of nickel 
 sulfate : 
 
 (a) Add sodium hydroxid solution, a few drops at 
 first, then an excess, and warm. 
 
 (b) Add ammonium sulfid solution and see if the 
 nickel sulfid precipitated is soluble in hydrochloric acid. 
 
 (c) Perform the borax bead test in both the oxi- 
 dizing and reducing flames. 
 
 COBALT 
 
 EXPERIMENT 211. Reactions of Cobalt Salts. 
 
 Use a dilute solution of cobalt chlorid or nitrate, and 
 add the reagents directed in Experiment 210. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 212. Analysis of a Nickel Coin. 
 Put a five-cent "nickel" in an evaporating dish, cover 
 with nitric acid, and warm for a few minutes. Pour 
 the solution into a beaker and dilute with an equal vol- 
 ume of water. Add ammonium sulfid solution to this 
 
Experiments 1 2 5 
 
 solution until no more precipitate is formed. Filter 
 (saving- the nitrate), wash the precipitate several times, 
 pierce a hole in the apex of the filter paper, and wash 
 the precipitate through with a little nitric acid into 
 a test tube. Heat until it dissolves. What is the color 
 of the solution, and the presence of what metal is 
 indicated by this color ? To a little of the solution add 
 ammonium hydroxid to alkalinity. What is the effect 
 on the color of the solution ? What metals do these 
 tests show to have been in the coin ? 
 
 Evaporate the first filtrate nearly to dryness. What 
 is the color of the concentrated solution ? The salts of 
 what metal have this color ? Test the solution with a 
 borax bead. What do you conclude ? What is the 
 qualitative composition of a nickel coin ? 
 
 CHROMIUM AND MANGANESE 
 
 EXPERIMENT 213. Reactions of Chromic Salts. 
 
 (a] Add a drop or so of sodium hydroxid solution to 
 2 c - c - of a solution of a chromic salt (chromic chlorid 
 or chrome alum). The precipitate is chromic hydroxid 
 Cr(OH) 3 . Add an excess of the sodium hydroxid solu- 
 tion and shake. Then heat to boiling. Compare results 
 with those obtained with zinc and aluminum. 
 
 (b) Add a little and then an excess of ammonium 
 sulfid to a chromic solution and compare the result 
 with that in (a). Does chromium form a sulfid? Do 
 aluminum and zinc ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 214. Borax Bead Test for Chrom- 
 ium. Touch a borax bead to a bit of chromium alum 
 and heat in both oxidizing and reducing flame of a 
 blowpipe. The green coloration is very characteristic. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 215. Reduction of Chromates to 
 Chromic Compounds. To 10 c - c - of potassium dichro- 
 inate solution add 2 c.c. each of concentrated hydrochloric 
 
126 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 acid and of alcohol, and warm gently. The chromate 
 is reduced to chromic chlorid and the alcohol is oxi- 
 dized to aldehyde. Note the green color characteristic 
 of chromic compounds and the peculiar odor of the 
 aldehyde. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 216. Properties of Chromates. (a) 
 Examine some crystals of potassium chromate and 
 potassium dichromate. What is the color of their solu- 
 tions ? 
 
 (b) To a solution of potassium chromate add a 
 little concentrated hydrochloric acid. The change of 
 color shows that the chromate has been changed into 
 the dichromate. 
 
 (V) To a solution of potassium dichromate add 
 potassium hydroxid drop by drop until the color changes 
 to yellow, an indication of the formation of a chromate. 
 
 (d) Place a little potassium dichromate in a test 
 tube, cover with concentrated hydrochloric acid, and 
 heat gently. What evidence is there that the acid is 
 oxidized ? Repeat with potassium chromate. 
 
 (e) To a solution of ferrous sulfate add a little 
 hydrochloric acid and then drop by drop a solution of 
 potassium dichromate. Test a portion of the solution 
 for ferric salts by means of potassium sulfocyanid 
 solution. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 217. Reactions of Manganous Salts. 
 (a) Add ammonium hydroxid to a manganous solution 
 (sulfate or chlorid). The precipitate is manganous 
 hydroxid, Mn(OH) 2 . 
 
 (b) Add ammonium sulfid to a manganous solution. 
 The precipitate is manganous sulfid, MnS. Divide it 
 into two parts and add hydrochloric acid to one and 
 acetic acid to the other, then add an excess of ammo- 
 nium hydroxid to each. What are your conclusions 
 regarding the solubility of manganese sulfid ? 
 
Experiments 127 
 
 EXPERIMENT 218. Borax Bead Test for Man- 
 ganese. Put a little of any manganese compound in 
 a borax bead and heat it in the oxidizing and in the 
 reducing flame of a blowpipe ; note the color of the 
 bead in each case. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 219. Oxidation with Potassium Per- 
 manganate. Mix with a solution of ferrous sulfate a 
 few drops of sulfuric acid, and add, drop by drop, a 
 solution of potassium permanganate. How can you 
 show that the permanganate oxidizes the ferrous to the 
 ferric salt ? Review Experiment 43. 
 
 SOME ORGANIC COMPOUNDS 
 
 EXPERIMENT 220. Preparation and Properties of 
 Aldehydes. Formaldehyde. Put about 4 C - C - of methyl 
 alcohol in a test tube and set the tube in a vertical 
 position in a rack or bottle. Make a spiral of copper 
 wire by winding it around a lead pencil, slip the spiral 
 off, and, holding it with the tongs, heat it as hot as 
 possible. Quickly drop the heated spiral into the 
 methyl alcohol. The pungent odor produced is due to 
 the formation of formaldehyde vapor. 
 
 AcetaldeJiyde. To about 3^- of potassium dichro- 
 mate solution in a test tube add a little concentrated 
 hydrochloric acid and a few drops of ethyl alcohol. 
 Heat gently. What does the change in color of the 
 mixture indicate ? Acetaldehyde is formed by the oxi- 
 dation of the alcohol, and the peculiar odor is due to 
 acetaldehyde vapor which is given off. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 221. Preparation and Properties of 
 Ethyl Acetate. Mix about 2 C - C - of ethyl alcohol with 
 an equal volume of dilute acetic acid in a test tube, and 
 add a half dozen or so drops of concentrated sulfuric 
 acid. Heat to boiling and note the odor of the ethyl 
 acetate formed. 
 
128 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 EXPERIMENT 222. Preparation and Properties of 
 
 Soap. Put loc^- 6 "- of a 10 to 12 per cent solution of 
 sodium hydroxid in an iron or tinned dish. Add either 
 35^- of lard or 100^- of castor oil, and boil gently for 
 about half an hour. Then add in small portions about 
 2$<?- of finely powdered salt, NaCl, and boil a few 
 minutes after all the salt has been added. When the 
 mixture is cool remove the soap formed. 
 
 What reaction does your soap show when tested by 
 litmus paper ? Add dilute sulfuric acid to a solution of 
 part of your soap in distilled water until no more solid 
 separates out. Remove the mixture of stearic and 
 palmitic acids thus obtained and note its physical 
 properties. 
 
 Put 2 C - C - of your soap solution into two separate 
 test tubes, and add to one a little magnesium sulfate 
 solution and to the other a little calcium sulfate solu- 
 tion. What occurs in each case, and what takes place 
 on boiling the mixtures for a minute or so ? Saturate 
 lime water with carbon dioxid as in Experiment 71 
 until a clear solution of acid calcium carbonate is 
 obtained. Add a little to a soap solution and note 
 what happens both before and after boiling the mixture. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 223. Fehling's Test for Sugar. Dis- 
 solve a little cane sugar in water, add a few drops of 
 sulfuric acid, and boil gently for about five minutes so 
 as to change the cane sugar into grape sugar. Mix 2 C - C - 
 each of copper sulfate, Rochelle salt, and sodium 
 hydroxid solutions in a test tube and heat to boiling. 
 Add a few drops of the grape sugar solution and boil 
 for three minutes. If no decided change occurs, add 
 more sodium hydroxid and more grape sugar and boil 
 again. The red substance obtained by the reducing 
 action of the sugar on the copper sulfate precipitate 
 obtained is cuprous oxid. 
 
Experiments 1 29 
 
 EXPERIMENT 224. Preparation and Properties of 
 
 Oxalic Acid. Place 5^"- of cane sugar in an evaporat- 
 ing dish, and add, in portions of about $ c - c -, 50^- f 
 concentrated nitric acid previously diluted with a tenth 
 of its volume of water. As the sugar reduces the nitric 
 acid with evolution of the red fumes of nitrogen per- 
 oxid, the operation should be conducted in the hood. 
 Evaporate on a water bath until the volume of the 
 liquid is less than lo^-. When the solution cools, crys- 
 tals of oxalic acid separate out. 
 
 Wash these crystals with a little water and note their 
 physical properties. Do not taste the acid, however, as 
 it is poisonous. 
 
 Dissolve a crystal of potassium permanganate in a 
 test tube a third full of water, and add half as much 
 diluted sulfuric acid. Add a few drops of this solution 
 to a solution of oxalic acid. Note the change in color. 
 Add a drop of ink to a solution of oxalic acid. Result ? 
 
 EXPERIMENT 225. Preparation and Properties of 
 Nitrobenzene. Pour 15 c - c - of concentrated nitric acid 
 into a flask (250 c - c -) and add an equal volume of con- 
 centrated sulfuric acid. Cool the mixture by holding 
 the flask so that tap water may flow around its sides. 
 Add, a few drops at a time, io c - c - of benzene, shaking 
 well and cooling the mixture thoroughly after each 
 addition. Pour the product into a bottle (1,000 to 
 1,500 c - c -) previously filled with cold water. The oily 
 liquid which sinks to the bottom is nitrobenzene. 
 
 Wash the nitrobenzene free from acid by running a 
 current of water into the bottle for some time, decant 
 as much of the water as possible, and then pour the oil 
 and the remainder of the water upon a wet filter paper. 
 When the water has drained off, place a test tube under 
 the funnel, punch a hole in the apex of the filter paper, 
 and catch the nitrobenzene. 
 
130 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 To remove the water which is mixed with the oil 
 put a few pieces of fused calcium chlorid in the test 
 tube and let stand for several hours. Note the physical 
 properties of the nitrobenzene. 
 
 EXPERIMENT 226. Preparation and Properties of 
 Aniline. Put 10^- of nitrobenzene in a flask (250^-), 
 add 20 c - c - of water and 15^"- of fine iron filings. Shake 
 well together and add 2 c - c - of concentrated hydrochloric 
 acid. Hold the flask in the hand and move it around 
 in a small Bunsen flame so as to keep the contents well 
 agitated. If the effervescence becomes too violent 
 remove the flask from the flame, and, if needs be, cool 
 it by immersion in water. Continue the heating until 
 the odor of nitrobenzene has disappeared or is very 
 faint. If the effervescence ceases, add a little more acid. 
 
 Now add enough 10 per cent solution of sodium 
 hydroxid to make the mixture strongly alkalin (litmus), 
 shake well, let settle for some time, and then decant 
 into a bottle. Clean the flask out (using concentrated 
 hydrochloric acid, if necessary), and decant from the 
 bottle into the flask. Connect the flask with a con- 
 denser and distil until the distillate no longer has a 
 milky appearance. The aniline distils with the steam 
 and on standing for some time settles out as an almost 
 colorless oil which is heavier than water. Note its 
 physical properties. 
 
APPENDIXES 
 
 APPENDIX A 
 
 QUALITATIVE ANALYSIS 
 
 INTRODUCTORY 
 
 Qualitative chemical analysis has to do with the operations and 
 methods which are employed in finding out what elements and 
 radicals are contained in a substance or mixture of substances. 
 
 Qualitative analysis consists mainly of the study of the solu- 
 bilities of substances. In the usual scheme of analysis the sub- 
 stance to be analyzed is first brought into solution. A solution of 
 a known compound (a reagent) is then added to this solution, and 
 if a precipitate of certain properties is formed, a definite conclusion 
 may be drawn as to the presence of certain elements or radicals 
 in the original substance taken. Other known solutions are added 
 to the filtrate from this precipitate, and from the formation of 
 additional precipitates and observation of their properties further 
 conclusions can be drawn as to the composition of the original 
 substance 
 
 The solubilities of certain salts of the commoner metals permit 
 of their classification into five groups, which are usually given the 
 name of the reagent which is added to effect the precipitation. 
 These groups are: 
 
 Precipitated as sulfids, PbS, 
 HgS, CuS, CdS, Bi 2 S 3 ,SnS or 
 SnS 2 , Sb 2 S 3 , or Sb 2 S 5 , As 2 S 3 
 or As 2 S 5 , by hydrogen sulfid. 
 The last three are soluble in 
 yellow ammonium sulfid, the 
 others not. 
 
 f Lead ] 
 
 
 Mercury 
 
 
 (tc salts) 
 
 II. Hydrogen 
 Sulfid Group 
 
 Copper 
 Cadmium 
 Bismuth 
 
 
 Tin 
 
 Antimony 
 
 A 
 
 lb 
 
 Arsenic 
 
 [i] 
 
11 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 
 Aluminum 1 
 
 
 Chromium 
 
 III. Ammonium 
 Sulfid Grout? 
 
 Iron 
 Cobalt 
 Nickel 
 
 
 Manganese 
 Zinc 
 
 tated as hydroxids, A1(OH) 3 , 
 Cr(OH) 3 , Fe(OH) 8 , by am- 
 monium hydroxid. The last 
 four are precipitated as sul- 
 fids, CoS, NiS, MnS, ZnS, by 
 j ammonium sulfid. 
 
 IV. Ammonium 
 Carbonate 
 Group 
 
 Calcium 1 Precipitated as carbonates, 
 Strontium CaCO 3 , SrCO 3 , BaCO 3 , 
 
 Barium MgCO 3 (soluble in NH 4 C1), 
 
 Magnesium J by ammonium carbonate. 
 
 V. Alkali Metals 
 
 f Lithium 
 I Sodium 
 I Potassium 
 I Ammonj,um 
 
 Not precipitated by any com- 
 mon reagents. 
 
 I. HYDROCHLORIC ACID GROUP 
 
 METHOD OF ANALYSIS 
 
 Add HC1 a little at a time to the solution as long as a precipi- 
 tate (ptt.) is formed. Shake up well, filter, and wash twice with a 
 little cold water. Punch a hole in the apex of the filter paper and 
 wash the precipitate into a beaker. Boil the water and filter 
 while hot. 
 
 Residue: AgCl, HgCl. 
 
 Wash with hot water and 
 twice pour over it enough 
 
 Residue: 
 
 Filtrate : 
 
 Hg-NH 2 -Cl 
 and Hg. 
 
 AgCl-2NH 8 
 
 Acidify with 
 
 A black resi- 
 
 HNO 3 ; a white 
 
 due proves the 
 
 ptt. proves the 
 
 presence of mer- 
 
 presence of 
 
 cury. 
 
 silver. 
 
 Filtrate: PbCl 2 
 Divide into two portions. 
 
 PORTION I. Add K 2 Cr.,O 7 or 
 K 2 CrO 4 ; a yellow ptt. soluble 
 in NaOH indicates the pres- 
 ence of lead. 
 
 PORTION II. Add KI ; a yel- 
 low ptt. soluble in hot water 
 and recrystallizing in plates 
 on cooling proves the presence 
 of lead. 
 
Qualitative Analysis iii 
 
 REACTIONS OF SOLUTIONS OF SILVER, LEAD, AND 
 MERCUROUS SALTS 
 
 SILVER 
 
 HC1 precipitates AgCl, white, curdy, changing on exposure to 
 the light from lavender to black ; soluble in NH 4 OH, forming 
 AgCl 2NH 3 , from which solution HNO 3 reprecipitates AgCl. 
 
 LEAD 
 
 HC1 precipitates PbCl 2 , white, flocculent, soluble in hot water, 
 crystallizing in long needles when solution cools. 
 
 H 2 SO 4 precipitates PbSO 4 , white. 
 
 K 2 Cr 2 O 7 or K 2 CrO 4 precipitates PbCrO 4 , yellow, soluble in 
 NaOH. 
 
 Kl precipitates PbI 2 , yellow, soluble in hot water, from which 
 when cold it crystallizes in shining plates. 
 
 H 2 S precipitates PbS, black, changed by hot and moderately 
 
 MERCURY 
 
 HC1 precipitates HgCl, white, changed by NH 4 OH into a 
 black mixture of HgNH,Cl and Hg. 
 
 II. HYDROGEN SULFID GROUP 
 
 METHOD OF ANALYSIS 
 
 Warm the nitrate from the Hydrochloric Acid Group and pass 
 a current of hydrogen sulfid through it. Make sure that precipi- 
 tation is complete by filtering a small portion, diluting the 
 nitrate, and treating it with H 2 S a few minutes. Filter and wash 
 thoroughly with hot water. Put a small portion of the precipitate 
 in an evaporating dish ; add a little ammonium polysulfid. If this 
 precipitate dissolves completely, Division A is absent ; if not, 
 treat the remainder of the precipitate with ammonium polysulfid 
 and warm (not boil} for about three minutes with occasional 
 stirring. Filter while hot and proceed as indicated in table for 
 Division A. 
 
IV 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 DIVISION A 
 
 Boil the precipitate in an evaporating dish with a small amount 
 of a mixture of equal volumes of strong nitric acid and water 
 until brown fumes cease to be given off freely. Dilute with a 
 little water and filter. 
 
 Filtrate : Lead, Bismuth, Copper, Cadmium Salts. 
 
 Add a little strong H 2 SO 4 and evaporate with 
 care until dense white fumes appear. Add an equal 
 
 volume of dilute H 2 SO 4 and filter. 
 
 Boil with 
 
 
 a very little 
 
 
 
 Filtrate : 
 
 Residue: 
 
 aqua regia. 
 
 Bismuth, Copper, Cadmium Salts. 
 
 PbS0 4 
 
 Filter, boil 
 the filtrate 
 
 Add NH 4 OH until strongly alkalin. 
 
 Wash, 
 
 until chlo- 
 
 A deep blue solution proves^the pres- 
 
 warm the 
 
 rin is ex- 
 
 ence of copper. A white ptt. indicates 
 bismuth. Filter and wash. 
 
 ptt. with 
 ammonium 
 
 pelled, then 
 add SnCU 
 
 
 acetate 
 
 and warm. 
 
 Fil 
 
 Copper, Ca 
 If copper is 
 absent : 
 
 trate : 
 
 dmium Salts. 
 If copper is 
 present : 
 
 Precipitate 
 Bi (OH) a or 
 
 basic salt 
 of bismuth. 
 
 and a few 
 drops of 
 HC 2 H 3 2 
 and filter. 
 To the fil- 
 
 A gray or 
 black ptt. 
 proves the 
 presence of 
 mercury. 
 
 Make slight- 
 ly acid with 
 
 Acidify with 
 dil. HC1 and 
 
 Add two 
 or three 
 
 trate add 
 K 2 Cr0 4 or 
 
 
 dil. HCland 
 
 precipitate 
 
 drops of 
 
 K 2 Cr 2 O 7 . 
 
 
 treat with 
 
 with H 2 S. 
 
 HC1 to the 
 
 A yellow 
 
 
 H 2 S. 
 
 Filter and 
 
 ptt. in the 
 
 ptt. soluble 
 
 
 A yellow 
 
 boil the ptt. 
 
 funnel and 
 
 in NaOH 
 
 
 ptt. proves 
 the pres- 
 
 immediately 
 with dilute 
 
 allow the 
 filtrate to 
 
 proves the 
 presence of 
 
 
 ence of cad- 
 
 H 2 S0 4 . Fil- 
 
 drop into a 
 
 lead. 
 
 
 mium. 
 
 ter, rejecting 
 
 beaker of 
 
 
 
 
 the residue. 
 
 water. 
 
 
 
 
 Dilute the 
 
 A white 
 
 
 
 
 colorless fil- 
 
 ptt. proves 
 
 
 
 
 trate with an 
 
 the pres- 
 
 
 
 
 equal volume 
 
 ence of bis- 
 
 
 
 
 of water and 
 
 muth. 
 
 
 
 
 treat with 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 2 S. 
 
 
 
 
 
 A yellow 
 
 
 
 
 
 ptt. proves 
 
 
 
 
 
 the presence 
 
 
 
 
 
 of cadmium. 
 
 
 
 
 Residue: 
 
 Mercuric 
 Salt. 
 
Qualitative Analysis v 
 
 REACTIONS OF SOLUTIONS OF MERCURIC, CUPRIC, 
 CADMIUM, AND BISMUTH SALTS 
 
 MERCURY 
 
 II 2 S precipitates HgS, black, insoluble in hot and concentrated 
 HNO 3 , but changed by prolonged action of that reagent into 
 Hg(NO 3 ) 2 - 2 HgS, white and insoluble in concentrated HNO 3 . 
 Both Hg(NO 3 ) 2 * 2 HgS and HgS are changed by aqua regia into 
 sulfur and HgCl 2 , which is soluble. HgS is insoluble in (NH 4 ) 2 S. 
 
 SnCl 2 reduces HgCl 2 to HgCl, white. An excess of SnCl 2 
 reduces the HgCl more or less to mercury, which gives the HgCl 
 a darker color. 
 
 COPPER 
 
 H 2 S precipitates CuS, black, changed by hot and concentrated 
 HNO 3 into sulfur and Cu(NO 3 ) 2 , which is soluble. CuS is insol- 
 uble in dilute H 2 SO 4 . CuS is slightly soluble in (NH 4 ) 2 S. 
 
 NH 4 OH precipitates light blue basic salts, readily soluble in 
 excess, producing deep blue solutions of ammonia cupric salts, as 
 CuSO 2 -4NH 3 . 
 
 CADMIUM 
 
 H 2 S precipitates CdS, varying in color from light yellow to 
 orange according to the conditions under which precipitation 
 takes place; easily soluble in concentrated HC1 or in hot and 
 dilute H,SO 4 ; changed by hot and concentrated HNO 3 into 
 sulfur and Cd(NO 3 ) 2 , which is soluble. CdS is insoluble in 
 (NH 4 ) 2 S. 
 
 NH 4 OH precipitates Cd(OH) 2 , white, readily soluble in excess, 
 producing ammonia cadmium salts, as Cd(NO 3 ) 2 ' 4NH 3 . 
 
 BISMUTH 
 
 H 2 S precipitates Bi 2 S 3 , dark brown ; changed by hot and con- 
 centrated HNO 3 into sulfur and Bi(NO 3 ) 3 , which is soluble. Bi 2 S 3 
 is insoluble in (NH 4 ) 2 S. 
 
 H 4 O added in large proportion to solutions of bismuth salts 
 which do not contain too much acid, precipitates basic salts, as 
 BiOCl, (BiO) 2 SO 4 , BiONO 3 , etc. 
 
 NH 4 OH precipitates Bi(OH) 3 or a basic salt, white ; insoluble 
 in excess ; soluble in dilute HC1. 
 
Elementary Chemistry 
 
 DIVISION B 
 
 Slightly acidify the ammonium sulfid solution with HC1. [If 
 the precipitate is white it is probably only sulfur.] Filter, reject- 
 ing the filtrate, as it contains no metals, transfer the precipitate 
 to a beaker, add a little concentrated HC1, heat to boiling for a 
 few minutes, and filter. 
 
 Filtrate: Tin, Antimony salts. 
 Place a bright iron wire or nail in the 
 filtrate, warm gently, let stand for fifteen 
 minutes, and then filter. 
 
 Filtrate : 
 
 SnCl 2 
 
 Add HgCl 2 . 
 A white ptt. get- 
 ting gray when 
 more of HgCl 2 
 is added and 
 heat applied, 
 proves presence 
 of tin. 
 
 Precipitate: Antimony 
 (in metallic state). 
 
 Wash thoroughly and 
 transfer to a beaker. Dis- 
 solve in a little cone. HC1 
 to which a few drops of 
 cone. HNO 3 has been 
 added. Evaporate nearly 
 to dryness ; then add a 
 large proportion of water. 
 The formation of a white 
 ptt. proves the presence of 
 antimony. 
 
 [Proof may be confirmed 
 by passing H 2 S into solu- 
 tion with formation of 
 orange ptt.] 
 
 Residue: 
 
 Arsenic Sulfids. 
 
 Dissolve in hot, 
 cone. HN0 3 . Add 
 a little of the solu- 
 tion to a test tube 
 nearly half full of a 
 solution of ammo- 
 nium molybdate, 
 and warm gently. 
 
 A yellow crystal- 
 line ptt. proves the 
 presence of arsenic. 
 Also try the special 
 tests. 
 
 REACTIONS OF SOLUTIONS OF TIN, ANTIMONY, AND 
 ARSENIC SALTS 
 
 TIN (Stannous) 
 
 H 2 S precipitates SnS, dark brown ; soluble in warm concen- 
 trated HC1 ; soluble in (NH 4 ) 2 S, forming sulfo-stannates, as 
 (NH 4 ) 2 SnS 3 , from which a dilute acid precipitates SnS 2 , yellow. 
 
 HgCl 2 is reduced by SnCl 2 in HC1 solution to HgCl, white; 
 an excess of SnCl 2 reduces some of the HgCl to mercury, which 
 imparts a darker color to the precipitate. 
 
 TIN (Stannic) 
 
 H 2 S precipitates SnS 2 , yellow, from solutions not containing 
 too much HC1 ; soluble in warm concentrated HC1 ; soluble in 
 (NH 4 ) 2 S, forming sulfo-stannates, as (NH 4 ) 2 SnS 3 . 
 
Qualitative Analysis vii 
 
 ANTIMONY (pus) 
 
 H 2 S precipitates Sb 2 S 3 , orange red ; soluble in warm, concen- 
 trated HC1 ; oxidized by hot, concentrated HNO 3 , forming sulfur 
 and H 3 SbO 4 , which is soluble. Sb 2 S 3 is soluble in (NH 4 ) 2 S ; 
 forming sulfo-antimonates, as (NH 4 ) 3 SbS <l , from which dilute 
 acids precipitate Sb 2 S 5 , orange red. 
 
 When SbCl 3 is added to a large proportion of water, SbOCl, 
 white, is produced, which is changed directly to Sb 2 S 3 when 
 treated with H 2 S. 
 
 ANTIMONY (fc) 
 
 H 2 S precipitates Sb 2 S 5 , orange red, and resembling Sb 2 S 3 
 in its behavior toward most reagents. 
 
 ARSENIC (ous) 
 
 H 2 S precipitates As 2 S 3 , lemon yellow; almost insoluble in 
 warm, concentrated HC1 ; oxidized by hot concentrated HNO 3 
 to H 3 AsO 4 , which is soluble, sulfur being set free. As 2 S 3 is 
 soluble in (NH 4 ) 2 S, forming sulfo-arsenates, as (NH 4 ) 3 AsS 4 , from 
 which HC1 precipitates As 2 S 5 . 
 
 ARSENIC (tc) 
 
 H 2 S precipitates As 2 S 5 , lemon yellow, and resembling As 2 S 3 
 in its behavior toward most reagents. The precipitation takes 
 place slowly and is more complete if the solution is warm, when 
 H 2 S reduces the arsenic solution to the arsenious condition and 
 As 2 S 3 is precipitated. 
 
 (NH 4 ) 2 MoO 4 , ammonium molybdate, added in excess to a 
 solution of arsenic acid containing HNO 3 precipitates ammonium 
 arseno-molybdate, yellow. Precipitation is best obtained by 
 adding the arsenic solution to a small test tube half full of 
 (NH 4 ) 2 MoO 4 . The mixture should then be warmed, but should 
 not be heated above 70, lest MoO 3 , white, be precipitated. 
 
 III. AMMONIUM SULFID GROUP 
 
 METHOD OF ANALYSIS 
 
 Add NH 4 OH to slight alkalinity, heat to boiling, then add 
 (NH 4 ) 2 S in slight excess ; heat again to boiling and allow the 
 precipitate to settle. Filter and wash thoroughly with hot 
 water. Without delay treat the precipitate in an evaporating 
 dish with a mixture of equal volumes of strong HC1 and water, 
 stirring well. Filter and wash immediately. 
 
Vlll 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 Residue: 
 
 Nickel, Cobalt Sul- 
 
 Filtrate: Iron, Aluminum, Chromium, Zinc, 
 Manganese Chlorids. 
 
 rids. 
 
 Expel any H 2 S which may be present by 
 
 Test with borax 
 
 boiling and divide into two unequal portions. 
 
 bead ; blue, cobalt ; 
 
 PORTION I. Evaporate the smaller portion 
 
 brown, nickel. 
 
 to small bulk, add a little chlorin w r ater, 
 
 To detect one of 
 
 and boil until excess of chlorin is' expelled. 
 
 these metals in the 
 
 To the cooled solution add KCNS. A red 
 
 presence of the other, 
 
 color proves the presence of iron. 
 
 dissolve the residue 
 
 PORTION II. To the larger portion add 
 
 in a little aqua regia. 
 Filter and evaporate 
 
 a little cone. HNO 3 and boil. Evaporate 
 to small bulk. Nearly neutralize with 
 
 to small bulk. Heat 
 to boiling and add 
 
 (NH 4 ),CO 3 , and, transferring the solution 
 to a flask, add five times its volume of sus- 
 
 an equal bulk of bro- 
 min water and then 
 
 pended BaCO 3 . Shake the flask vigorously 
 from time to time for half an hour and then 
 
 of NaOH. Boil vig- 
 
 filter. 
 
 orously and add a 
 
 
 little bromin water 
 
 
 
 from time to time. 
 
 Precipitate: 
 
 Filtrate: Zinc, 
 
 Wash thoroughly 
 
 Chromium, Aluminum, 
 
 Manganese Salts. 
 
 with boiling water 
 
 Iron Hydroxids. 
 
 PORTION I. Add 
 
 by decantation, filter 
 and boil the ptt. with 
 NH 4 OH and NH 4 C1 
 
 PORTION I. Fuse on 
 platinum foil with 
 Na 2 CO 3 andKNO 3 . A 
 
 HC 2 H 3 O 2 and 
 then H 2 S . A 
 white ptt. soluble 
 
 and filter. 
 
 yellow product indicates 
 
 in HC1 proves the 
 
 
 
 the presence of chro- 
 
 presence ot %ittc* 
 
 Residue: 
 
 Filtrate: 
 
 mium. Dissolve in 
 
 PORTION II. Put 
 
 Cobalt 
 
 Nickel. 
 
 water and make acid 
 
 a very little in an 
 
 [Co(OH) 3 ] 
 
 Test with 
 borax 
 bead. 
 
 Treat 
 withH 2 S 
 A black 
 ptt. indi- 
 
 with HC 2 H 3 O 2 . A red 
 ptt. with AgNO 3 and 
 a yellow ptt. with 
 Pb(C 2 H 3 O 2 ) 2 proves 
 the presence of chro- 
 
 evaporating dish, 
 add 1 cubic centi- 
 meter of cone. 
 H 2 SO 4 and heat 
 until dense white 
 
 
 cates the 
 
 mium. 
 
 fumes appear. 
 
 
 presence 
 
 PORTION II. Add an 
 
 Transfer the cooled 
 
 
 of nickel. 
 
 equal bulk of solid 
 
 contents of the 
 
 
 v^onnrm 
 
 Na 2 CO 3 , half as much 
 
 dish to a test tube 
 
 
 with bo- 
 
 TO V Vlf^Q (\ 
 
 Ba(OH) 2 , and 5 cubic 
 
 half full of H 2 S0 4 , 
 
 
 I tiX IJt-cUl. 
 
 centimeters of water. 
 
 add PbO 2 , heat to 
 
 
 
 Boil two or three min- 
 
 boiling and allow 
 
 
 
 utes. Filter, and to the 
 
 to stand until sus- 
 
 
 
 filtrate add NH 4 C1 and 
 
 pended matter set- 
 
 
 
 boil for some time. A 
 
 tles. A red or 
 
 
 
 white ptt. , best seen 
 
 purple colored so- 
 
 
 
 against a dark back- 
 
 lution proves the 
 
 
 
 ground, proves the 
 
 presence of man- 
 
 
 
 presence of aluminum. 
 
 ganese. 
 
Qualitative Analysis ix 
 
 REACTIONS OF SOLUTIONS OF NICKEL, COBALT, IRON, 
 
 MANGANESE, ZINC, ALUMINUM, AND 
 
 CHROMIUM SALTS 
 
 NICKEL 
 
 NH 4 OH in small proportion precipitates Ni(OH) 2 , green; if 
 in excess, greenish blue basic salts. The precipitates are soluble 
 in NH 4 OH in the presence of ammonium salts. Both solutions 
 and precipitates are changed by (NH 4 ) 2 S into NiS, black. 
 
 KOH or NaOH precipitates Ni(OH) 2 , green ; insoluble in 
 excess. Ni(OH) 2 is oxidized by boiling with bromin water and 
 NaOH to Ni(OH) 3 , black ; when this is boiled with NH 4 OH and 
 NH 4 C1 it dissolves. 
 
 (NH 4 ) 2 S precipitates from neutral or alkalin solutions NiS, 
 black; somewhat soluble in excess of (NH 4 ) 2 S, more readily in 
 the presence of NH 4 OH, forming a dark brown .solution from 
 which NiS is reprecipitated if the solvent is removed by boiling. 
 NiS is insoluble in cold and not very dilute HC1 ; it is changed 
 by aqua regia to free sulfur and NiCl 2 , which dissolves. NiS is 
 oxidized by the oxygen of the air to NiSO 4 . 
 
 A borax bead is colored brown when fused with a compound 
 of nickel. 
 
 COBALT 
 
 NH 4 OH precipitates blue basic salts ; easily soluble in NH 4 OH 
 in the presence of ammonium salts. Both precipitate and solution 
 are changed by (NH.^S into CoS. 
 
 KOH or NaOH precipitates from cold solutions a blue basic 
 salt which, when warmed with the alkali, changes to Co(OH) 2 , 
 pink. Co(OH) 2 is oxidized to Co(OH) 3 , black, by boiling with 
 bromin water and NaOH. The Co(OH) 3 is not affected by boil- 
 ing with NH 4 OH and NH 4 C1. 
 
 (NH 4 ) 2 S precipitates from neutral or alkalin solutions CoS, 
 black ; insoluble in excess ; practically insoluble in not very dilute 
 HC1 ; attacked by aqua regia, forming sulfur and CoCl 2 , which 
 dissolves. CoS is oxidized by the air to CoSO 4 . 
 
 A borax bead is colored blue when fused with a compound of 
 cobalt. 
 
 IRON {Ferrous} 
 
 NOTE. As ferrous salts oxidize very readily to ferric, it is only 
 by taking special precautions that a solution of ferrous salt can 
 
x Elementary Chemistry 
 
 be kept from oxidizing. The solution of FeSO 4 should be heated 
 with iron filings and H 2 SO 4 , when the hydrogen will reduce any 
 ferric salt to the ferrous condition. 
 
 NH 4 OH in neutral solutions precipitates incompletely 
 Fe(OH) 2 , which oxidizes promptly to compounds first green, then 
 black, and finally reddish brown Fe(OH* 3 . When these precip- 
 itates are treated with H 2 S they change into FeS, black. 
 
 KOH or NaOH precipitates Fe(OH) 2 , white, but oxidizing as 
 described above. 
 
 (NH 4 ) 2 S precipitates FeS, black'; attacked by hot concentrated 
 HNO 3 , forming sulfur and Fe(NO 3 ) 3 , which dissolves. FeS is 
 soluble in dilute HC1, and on exposure to moist air oxidizes to 
 FeSO 4 , and finally to a basic ferric sulfate which is brown. 
 
 BaCO 3 , shaken with a cold, neutral, or slightly acid solution of 
 FeCl 2 , does not precipitate a compound of iron. It is most con- 
 venient to employ the BaCCXj suspended in water. 
 
 KCNS, potassium sulfocyanate, produces no red coloration in 
 solutions of ferrous salts. 
 
 Concentrated HNO 3 , or chlorin water, oxidizes ferrous to ferric 
 salts very promptly at the boiling temperature. 
 
 IRON (Ferric} 
 
 NH 4 OH, KOH, or NaOH, precipitates Fe(OH) 3 , reddish brown 
 and gelatinous ; changed by (NH 4 ) 2 S into FeS, black. 
 
 BaCO 3 , when shaken with a cold, neutral, or but slightly acid 
 solution of a ferric salt, precipitates Fe(OH) 3 or a basic salt. 
 
 KCNS, potassium sulfocyanate, in excess, forms with solutions 
 of ferric salts a deep red complex soluble salt. 
 
 H 2 S reduces acid solutions of ferric salts to the ferrous condi- 
 tion with separation of sulfur. 
 
 MANGANESE (pus) 
 
 NH 4 OH, KOH, or NaOH, precipitates Mn(OH) 2 , white, oxi- 
 dized quickly to dark brown compounds. The precipitate is 
 changed to MnS by (NH 4 ) 2 S. 
 
 (NH 4 ) 2 S precipitates MnS, pink, soluble in dilute acids ; when 
 exposed to the air it turns brown. 
 
 BaCO 3 , shaken with a cold, neutral, or slightly acid solution of 
 MnCl 2 , does not precipitate a compound of manganese. 
 
 Fusion with Na 2 CO 3 and KNO 3 oxidizes manganese com- 
 pounds to green salts of manganic acid, K 2 MnO 4 and Na 2 MnO 4 . 
 
Qualitative Analysis xi 
 
 PbO 2 , lead dioxid, boiled with H 2 SO 4 and a little of a man- 
 ganese compound, oxidizes the latter to permanganic acid, 
 HMnO 4 , which imparts a pink or purple color to the solution. If 
 a chlorid or HC1 be present in any considerable quantity it must 
 be removed by evaporating with concentrated H 2 SO 4 until dense 
 fumes appear. 
 
 ZINC 
 
 NH 4 OH produces in neutral solutions a partial precipitation 
 of Zn(OH) 2 , white and gelatinous ; soluble in ammonium salts 
 producing double salts ; changed by (NH 4 ),S into ZnS. 
 
 H 2 S precipitates ZnS, white, incompletely from neutral solu- 
 tions of zinc salts of the inorganic acids ; it is soluble in most 
 dilute acids, but is only slightly soluble in acetic acid, and 
 wholly insoluble in a solution containing an alkalin acetate, as 
 NaC 2 H 3 O 2 . 
 
 (NH 4 ) 2 S precipitates ZnS, white. 
 
 BaCO 3 , when shaken with a cold, neutral, or but slightly acid 
 solution of ZnCl 2 , does not precipitate any compound of zinc. 
 
 ALUMINUM 
 
 NH 4 OH precipitates A1(OH) 3 , white, gelatinous; somewhat 
 soluble in excess, the A1(OH) 3 being reprecipitated by heat. 
 
 (NH 4 ) 2 S precipitates A1(OH) 3 , as the sulfid is decomposed by 
 water. 
 
 BaCO 3 , when shaken with a cold, neutral, or slightly acid solu- 
 tion of A1C1 3 , precipitates A1(OH) 3 or basic carbonates. 
 
 CHROMIUM 
 
 NH 4 OH precipitates Cr(OH) 3 , green, gelatinous, difficultly 
 soluble in excess and reprecipitated by boiling. 
 
 (NH 4 ) 2 S precipitates Cr(OH) 3 . 
 
 BaCO 3 , when shaken with a cold, neutral, or but slightly acid 
 solution of CrCl 3 , precipitates Cr(OH) 3 or basic carbonates. 
 
 Fusion with KNO 3 and Na 2 CO 3 oxidizes chromium compounds 
 to K 2 CrO 4 and Na 2 CrO 4 , yellow. If the fused mass is dissolved 
 in water and the solution acidified with acetic acid, the addition 
 of lead acetate precipitates PbCrO 4 , yellow. 
 
Xll 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 IV. AMMONIUM CARBONATE GROUP 
 
 (The Alkalin Earth Metals] 
 
 METHOD OF ANALYSIS 
 
 To the solution add NH 4 C1, NH 4 OH, and then (NH 4 ) 2 CO 3 . 
 Warm, and if a precipitate appears, filter and wash. 
 
 Precipitate: BaCO 3 , SrCO 3 , CaCO 3 
 
 Filtrate : 
 
 Pour small portions of warm acetic acid upon the 
 
 Mg. salt. 
 
 ptt., avoiding an excess, until it is dissolved. To a 
 
 AddNH 4 OH 
 
 small portion of the solution add K 2 Cr 2 O 7 , and if a 
 
 and 
 
 ptt. appears add K 2 Cr 2 O 7 to all of the solution, and 
 
 Na 2 HPO 4 . 
 
 warm and filter. 
 
 R u'b the 
 
 Precipitate : 
 
 Filtrate : 
 
 inner surface 
 of the test 
 
 BaCrO 4 
 
 Sr(C 2 H 3 2 ) 2 , Ca(C 2 H 3 2 ) 2 
 
 tube with a 
 glass rod. A 
 
 Dissolve in 
 HC1, warm 
 
 Make alkalin with NH 4 OH, add 
 (NH 4 ) 2 CO 3 and warm. Filter the 
 
 crystalline 
 ptt. proves 
 
 the solution 
 
 ptt. (if none appears, Sr and Ca are 
 
 the presence 
 
 and add a 
 
 absent), wash thoroughly, and dis- 
 
 of magne- 
 
 few drops of 
 
 solve on the filter with the least 
 
 sium. 
 
 H 2 S0 4 . A 
 
 possible quantity of HC1. Evaporate 
 
 
 white ptt. 
 
 just to dryness, dissolve in a little 
 
 
 (which, how- 
 
 water, filter if not clear, and evapo- 
 
 
 ever, may 
 
 rate to small bulk. Divide into two 
 
 
 appear yel- 
 
 portions. 
 
 
 low from the 
 
 
 
 K 2 Cr 2 O 7 in 
 the solution) 
 
 PORTION I 
 
 PORTION II 
 
 
 proves the 
 
 SrCl 2 
 
 CaCl 2 
 
 
 presence of 
 
 Add a little 
 
 Add a little 
 
 
 barium. 
 
 CaSO 4 , heat to 
 
 K 2 SO 4 and heat to 
 
 
 
 boiling, and if 
 
 boiling. If a ptt. 
 
 
 
 no ptt. appears 
 
 forms, filter it off 
 
 
 
 at once let stand 
 
 and to the filtrate 
 
 
 
 for at least ten 
 
 add NH 4 OH till 
 
 
 
 minutes. A fine 
 
 alkalin, then 
 
 
 
 white ptt. proves 
 
 (NH 4 ) 2 C 2 O 4 and 
 
 
 
 the presence of 
 
 warm. A white 
 
 
 
 strontium. 
 
 ptt. proves the 
 
 
 
 
 presence of cal- 
 
 
 
 
 cium. 
 
 
Qualitative Analysis xiii 
 
 REACTIONS OF SOLUTIONS OF BARIUM, STRONTIUM, 
 CALCIUM, AND MAGNESIUM SALTS 
 
 BARIUM 
 
 Na 2 CO 3 or (NH 4 ) CO 3 precipitates from neutral or alkalin 
 solutions BaCO 3 , white, flocculent at first, but becoming crystal- 
 line when gently warmed. BaCO 3 is very slightly soluble in 
 NH 4 C1; freely soluble in HC1 and acetic acid, HC 2 H 3 O 2 , with 
 effervescence. 
 
 H 2 SO 5 precipitates BaSO 4 , white, practically insoluble in 
 water, acids, or alkalis. 
 
 Na 2 CO 3 or(NH 4 ),CO 3 precipitates SrCO 3 , resembling BaCO 3 . 
 
 STRONTIUM 
 
 H 2 SO 4 precipitates SrSO 4 . Calcium sulfate, although but 
 slightly soluble in water, is more soluble than SrSO 4 , so that 
 CaSO 4 will precipitate SrSO 4 from a concentrated solution of a 
 strontium salt. Precipitation is more complete when the mixture 
 is warmed or when a concentrated solution of K 2 SO 4 is used 
 instead of the CaSO 4 . 
 
 K 2 CrO 4 or K 2 Cr 2 O 7 does not precipitate SrCrO 4 from dilute 
 solutions acidified with HC 2 H 3 O 2 . 
 
 CALCIUM 
 
 Na 2 CO 3 or(NH 4 ) 2 CO 3 precipitates CaCO 3 , resembling BaCO 3 . 
 
 K 2 CrO 4 or K 2 Cr 2 O 7 produces no precipitate in dilute solutions 
 acidified with HC 2 H 3 O 2 , since CaCrO 4 is soluble in both water 
 and HC 2 H 3 O 2 . 
 
 (NH 4 ) 2 C 2 6 4 precipitates CaC 2 O 4 , white, crystalline. 
 
 H 2 SO 4 or a soluble sulfate, as K 2 SO 4 , precipitates CaSO 4 only 
 from concentrated solutions, and then but partially. 
 
 MAGNESIUM 
 
 NH 4 OH precipitates from neutral solutions containing no 
 ammonium salts one-half of the magnesium as Mg(OH) 2 . The 
 other half unites with the ammonium salt which is formed to 
 produce double salts, such as MgCl 2 2NH 4 C1. These double 
 salts are soluble in water and not precipitated by NH 4 OH or 
 (NH 4 ) 2 CO 3 . The object of adding NH 4 C1 in the analysis is to 
 form the double salt and thus prevent the precipitation of the 
 magnesium. 
 
XIV 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 Na 2 HPO 4 or NaNH 4 HPO 4 precipitates from solutions of 
 double salts, such as MgCl./ 2 NH 4 C1, in the presence of NH 4 OH, 
 MgNH 4 PO 4 , white and crystalline. Crystallization may be 
 hastened by stirring the solution with a glass rod. 
 
 V, THE ALKALI METALS: AMMONIUM, SODIUM, 
 POTASSIUM 
 
 METHOD OF ANALYSIS 
 
 Ammonia. Put a little of the original substance in a small 
 beaker and add NaOH. Cover the beaker with a watch glass, on 
 the under side of which is placed a moistened piece of red litmus 
 paper. Heat gently, but not to boiling. If the litmus paper 
 turns blue the presence of ammonia is proved. 
 
 Sodium and Potassium. Evaporate the filtrate from the 
 ammonium carbonate group to dryness and heat until no more 
 fumes of ammonium salts are given off. Divide the residue into 
 two portions. 
 
 PORTION I. Sodium, Potas- 
 sium Salts. 
 
 Moisten a small portion with 
 HC1, slip a clean platinum wire 
 into it and introduce into the 
 Bunsen flame. A yellow flame 
 proves the presence of sodium ; 
 a violet flame proves the pres- 
 ence of potassium. 
 
 If sodium is present, view 
 the flame through a blue glass, 
 whereby the yellow rays are 
 cut off, but the violet allowed 
 to pass. 
 
 PORTION II. Potassium, So- 
 dium Salts. 
 
 Dissolve in least possible 
 amount of water and divide solu- 
 tion into two portions. 
 
 PORTION I. 
 Add platinum 
 chlorid solution 
 and keep under 
 observation for 
 some time. A 
 yellow ptt. 
 proves pres- 
 ence of potas- 
 sium. 
 
 PORTION II. 
 Add picric acid 
 solution. A yel- 
 low ptt. indi- 
 cates presence 
 of potassium. 
 
 REACTIONS OF SOLUTIONS OF AMMONIUM, POTASSIUM, 
 AND vSoDiUM SALTS 
 
 When 
 
 AMMONIA 
 
 KOH or NaOH when warmed with an ammonium salt liberates 
 ammonia, which turns moist red litmus paper blue. 
 
 any ammonium salts are heated they break up into 
 
Qualitative Analysis xv 
 
 volatile constituents so that through heat ammonia may be sepa- 
 rated from non-volatile substances. 
 
 SODIUM 
 
 Flame test. A sodium salt introduced into a Bunsen flame on 
 a platinum wire colors it an intense yellow. 
 
 POTASSIUM 
 
 Platinum chlorid, PtCl 4 , produces a yellow precipitate. 
 
 Picric acid produces a yellow precipitate. 
 
 Flame test. A potassium salt introduced into a Bunsen flame 
 on a platinum wire colors it violet. As this color is marked by 
 even a very small proportion of sodium, if that element is present, 
 the flame should be observed through blue glass, which absorbs 
 the yellow light. 
 
 DETECTION OF ACIDS 
 
 I. BARIUM CHLORID GROUP 
 
 Sulfuric acid, H.,SO 4 , precipitates BaSO 4 , white, insoluble in 
 HC1. 
 
 In neutral solution phosphoric acid, H 3 PO 4 , precipitates 
 Ba 3 PO 4 , white, soluble in HC1. 
 
 Sulfurous acid, H 2 SO 3 , precipitates BaSO 3 , white, soluble in 
 HC1 with evolution of SO., (odor). 
 
 II. SILVER NITRATE GROUP 
 
 Hydrochloric acid, HC1, precipitates AgCl ; white curds very 
 soluble in NH 4 OH. 
 
 Hydrobromic acid, HBr, precipitates AgBr, pale yellow, 
 slowly soluble in NH 4 OH. 
 
 Hydriodic acid, HI, precipitates Agl, yellow, very slightly 
 soluble in NH 4 OH. 
 
 III. SPECIAL TESTS FOR SOME COMMON ACIDS 
 Carbonates. Most carbonates give up their carbon dioxid 
 when acted upon by HC1 or HNO 3 . (See Experiment 67.) 
 
 Sulfids. HC1 evolves H 2 S readily from the sulfids of the 
 alkali and alkalin earth metals, and from sulfids of magnesium, 
 manganese, zinc, and iron; less readily from those of lead, bis- 
 muth, cadmium, antimony, tin, nickel, and cobalt ; from other 
 sulfids with difficulty or not at all. 
 
x r /i Elementary Chemistry 
 
 H 2 S blackens filter paper moistened with lead acetate solution. 
 
 A sulfid, when fused with a small piece of solid NaOH on a 
 crucible cover, forms Na 2 S, which, when moistened and placed on 
 a silver coin, gives a black stain of Ag 2 S. 
 
 Ace fates. Concentrated H.,SO 4 when warmed with an acetate 
 liberates acetic acid, HC 2 H 3 O 2 , recognizable odor. (See also 
 ethyl acetate, Experiment 221.) 
 
 In neutral solution FeCl gives a dark red color to a solution 
 of an acetate. 
 
 Nitrates. (See Experiment 129.) 
 
APPENDIX B 
 
 THE METRIC SYSTEM OF WEIGHTS AND 
 MEASURES 
 
 The metric system of weights and measures is 
 employed in the affairs of everyday life in most of the 
 countries of continental Europe, and is almost exclu- 
 sively used in science. 
 
 The fundamental unit is the meter, which is a unit 
 of length a little over a yard long. The other units of 
 length are derived from the meter by successively 
 multiplying and dividing it by ten. The names of 
 these derived units are indicated by prefixes. Thus, 
 the multiple prefixes are the Greek words for ten, 
 deca-, hundred, hecto-, and thousand, kilo-, and the sub- 
 multiple prefixes are the Latin words for ten, deci-, 
 hundred, centi-, and thousand, milli-. 
 
 The unit of weight or mass is the gram, which is the 
 weight of a cubic centimeter of water at 4. The same 
 prefixes as are given above are used in expressing the 
 names for the multiples and sub-multiples of the gram. 
 
 The unit of volume is the liter, which is the volume 
 occupied by 1,000 cubic centimeters (one cubic deci- 
 meter of water); 1,000 grams (one kilogram) of water 
 occupies one liter at 4. 
 
 In this system fractions must always be expressed 
 decimally, and only one unit should be employed in 
 designating a quantity measured. Thus, the fractions 
 %, y$, ^A, etc., are written 0.5, 0.33, 0.75, and so on. 
 Also the weight of an object is not given as nine grams, 
 four decigrams, and six centigrams, even when abbre- 
 viated into 9^-, 4^-, and 6 ^-, but should be written 9.46^-. 
 
 [ xvii ] 
 
 3h 
 
XV111 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 The relations between the units, multiples, and sub- 
 multiples of the metric system are shown in the 
 
 TABLE OF THE METRIC SYSTEM 
 
 Length 
 
 Weight 
 
 Volume 
 
 Notation 
 
 Kilometer 
 
 Kilogram 
 
 Kiloliter 
 
 IOOO. 
 
 Hectometer 
 
 Hectogram 
 
 Hectoliter 
 
 IOO. 
 
 Decameter _. 
 
 Decagram 
 
 Decaliter 
 
 10. 
 
 METER 
 
 GRAM 
 
 LITER 
 
 i . 
 
 Decimeter 
 
 Decigram 
 
 Deciliter 
 
 O. I 
 
 Centimeter 
 
 Centigram _ 
 
 Centiliter . . 
 
 O.OI 
 
 Millimeter 
 
 Milligram.. 
 
 Milliliter 
 
 O.OOI 
 
 
 
 
 
 It is evident from the table that 10 millimeters equal 
 one centimeter, 10 centimeters equal one decimeter, 10 
 decimeters equal one meter, 10 meters equal one hecto- 
 meter, and 10 hectometers equal one kilometer. Anal- 
 ogous statements are true for the units of weight and 
 volume. 
 
 The abbreviations most often used in this book are : 
 cm. f or centimeter ; c - c - for cubic centimeter ; L for liter ; 
 and # for gram. 
 
 The relations of the weights and measures of the 
 metric system to the weights and measures commonly 
 used in English-speaking countries are shown by the 
 
 TABLE OF METRIC EQUIVALENTS 
 
 One meter 
 
 
 
 39-37 
 
 inches 
 
 One kilometer 
 
 
 
 0.62 
 
 mile 
 
 One centimeter 
 
 
 
 o 39 
 
 inch 
 
 One liter 
 
 . 
 
 i 06 
 
 liquid, quart 
 
 
 
 
 
 One gram 
 
 
 
 15-43 
 
 grains 
 
 One kilogram 
 
 
 
 2 2 
 
 pounds (Avoir.) 
 
 One metric ton 
 
 
 
 2204 
 
 pounds 
 
 One inch _ 
 
 
 
 2.54 
 
 centimeters 
 
 One mile 
 
 
 
 1.61 
 
 kilometers 
 
 One cubic inch 
 
 
 
 16.39 
 
 cubic centimeters 
 
 One liquid quart 
 
 
 
 0-95 
 
 liter 
 
 One pound (Avoir.) 
 
 
 
 0-45 
 
 kilogram 
 
 One ounce 
 
 
 
 28.35 
 
 grams 
 
 Onfi o-rflin fAnoth "k 
 
 __ 
 
 o . 06/18 
 
 eram 
 
APPENDIX C 
 
 100 
 
 INSTRUMENTS FOR WEIGHING AND 
 MEASURING 
 
 The Thermometer. The thermometer is an in- 
 strument for measuring temperatures. Its action de- 
 pends upon the fact that liquids expand 
 when heated, and contract when cooled. 
 The liquids in common use are mercury 
 or alcohol ; water is not suitable, as it 
 freezes at too high a temperature. 
 Chemical thermometers (Fig. a) consist 
 of a glass tube with minute bore, which 
 is blown out into a bulb at the end. The 
 bulb is almost invariably made cylindri- 
 cal in shape so that the thermometer 
 may be thrust through a cork closing a 
 flask, test tube, or bottle, the tempera- 
 ture of the interior of which is to be 
 found. Details as to the making of ther- 
 mometers cannot be gone into here, but 
 brief mention may be made of the 
 method employed in graduating the 
 instrument. 
 
 The bulb is placed in a dish filled 
 with melting ice, and the position of the 
 liquid in the stem marked on the glass. 
 The instrument is then placed in steam 
 issuing from water which is kept briskly 
 boiling under a pressure of one atmos- 
 phere. The liquid expands much more than does the 
 glass and rises in the stem. This new position is also 
 
 [xix] 
 
 Fig. a 
 
 THERMOMETERS 
 
XX 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 marked on the glass. The portion of the stem between 
 the points thus fixed is divided into a certain number of 
 equal parts, the number depending" upon what scale is 
 adopted. The stem above and below these fixed points 
 is likewise divided into parts which 
 are equal to those between the two 
 fixed points. 
 
 In the Centigrade scale, which 
 is in general use in continental 
 Europe, and in almost exclusive 
 use among scientists, the interval 
 between the temperature of melt- 
 ing ice and boiling water is divided 
 into 100 equal parts ; the lower tem- 
 perature is set at o and the higher 
 at 100. The Centigrade scale alone 
 is employed in this book. 
 
 In the Fahrenheit sca/e, which is 
 in general use in English-speaking 
 countries, the interval between the 
 fixed points is divided into 180 
 equal parts, and the temperature of 
 melting ice is set at 32 and that of 
 boiling water at 212. 
 
 The value of a Centigrade degree 
 is 1.8 times that of a Fahrenheit de- 
 gree, and 32 Fahrenheit marks the 
 same temperature as o Centigrade. 
 To convert degrees C. into de- 
 grees F., multiply by 1.8 and add 32. To convert degrees 
 F. into degrees C., subtract 32 and divide by 1.8. 
 
 The Barometer. The barometer is used for meas- 
 uring the pressure of the atmosphere. In its simplest 
 form it consists of a straight glass tube, about a meter 
 long and closed at one end. This is completely filled 
 
 Fig. & A SIMPLE 
 
 BAROMETER 
 
Instruments for Weighing and Measuring xxi 
 
 with mercury, which is boiled in the tube in order to 
 drive out every trace of air or moisture, and its open 
 end then placed under the surface of mercury in a dish 
 (Fig. b). The mercury falls in the tube to a height of 
 about f j6 cm -. The liquid does not all run out of the tube 
 because the atmosphere pressing down upon the mer- 
 cury in the dish pushes it up until the weight of liquid 
 in the tube exactly balances the pressure of the atmos- 
 phere. If for any cause the pressure of the atmosphere 
 
 Fig. C A TRIP BALANCE 
 
 becomes greater, it will push the mercury higher up in 
 the tube ; and in a similar fashion, if the atmospheric 
 pressure becomes less, it cannot support so long a column, 
 and accordingly the liquid in the tube falls somewhat. 
 The Balance. The balance serves to find the 
 weight of an object. When the weight is to be ascer- 
 tained only to tenths of grams, the form of balance 
 known as the "trip " (Fig. c] is excellent. The weights 
 accompanying need have no pieces less than 5 f- t as the 
 beam and sliding weight in the front permit of the 
 weighing to tenths of grams up to 5 s-. 
 
XX11 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 In the quantitative work of this book, a balance 
 weighing to hundredths of grams at least is required. 
 
 Balances sensi- 
 tive to a milli- 
 gram are even 
 better, but are 
 much more ex- 
 pensive and must 
 be enclosed in a 
 glass case to pre- 
 vent currents of 
 air from making 
 them work too 
 erratically. Either 
 an equal-armed 
 
 balance (Fig. d] or an unequal-armed one (Fig. e) may 
 be used. Of the former there are numerous excellent 
 makes on the market. They require the use of a box of 
 weights contain- 
 ing tenths and 
 hundredths of 
 grams. 
 
 The form of 
 balance in Fig. e 
 was devised by 
 the author for the 
 quantitative work 
 of the elementary 
 chemistry labor- 
 atory. Its advan- 
 tages are ease in 
 moving about, 
 rapidity of weigh- 
 ing, and " non-losableness " of the weights, which are 
 rings moving along the beam. 
 
 Fig. e UNEQUAL-ARMED BALANCE 
 
Instruments for Weighing and Measuring xxiii 
 
 RULES TO BE OBSERVED IN WEIGHING 
 
 1. Always leave the balance and weight 
 in a clean and usable condition. 
 
 2. Never handle Hie vv eights with the 
 fingers ; use forceps. 
 
 3. Do not weigh anything but 
 metals (mercury and sodium ex- 
 cepted) en the bare scale pan. 
 Liquids should be weighed in a 
 dish or a beaker, the weight of 
 which has already been found. 
 Solids should be placed on a 
 piece of paper creased twice at so c - c - 
 right angles so as to sink in 
 a little at the center (Fig. c). 
 
 Graduated Vessels. For measuring 
 rather large volumes of liquids graduated 
 cylinders (Figs. / and g) of 
 2$o c - c - or 50^- capacity are 
 used. Volumetric flasks 
 (Fig. h) are also employed. 
 For measuring small vol- 
 umes of liquids pipettes 
 (Fig. i) and burettes (Fig. 
 54, page 77) are used. Pip- 
 ettes are usually graduated 
 to deliver 5 c - c -, io c - c - t 25^-, 
 
 or 50 c - c -. In using a pipette, its tip is 
 
 dipped into the liquid, which is then 
 
 sucked up nearly to the top by the 
 
 mouth, and the upper opening quickly 
 
 closed with the finger. By lifting up the 
 
 fore finger so as to let air into the upper p . g fc _ VOLU _ 
 
 part of the pipette the liquid may be METRIC FLASK 
 
 Fig. f 250^. 
 
 CYLINDER 
 
XXIV 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 made to drop out until its level comes even with the 
 mark on the stem. The definite volume of liquid 
 thus measured may then be delivered into the 
 vessel in which it is to be used. 
 
 Burettes are usually graduated into tenths of 
 cubic centimeters and may hold either 25 c - c - or 
 50 c - c - ; but as sometimes the spaces are divided 
 into 0.2 c - c -, that is, fifths of a cubic centimeter, 
 a burette should be carefully examined before it 
 is used in order that it may be read correctly 
 according to its scale of division. They are 
 clamped vertically to a support and rilled by 
 pouring in the liquid. Enough liquid is allowed 
 to run out by opening the clamp to drive out all 
 air in the delivery tube,\and then by noting the 
 reading of the level of the liquid in the burette, 
 the required volume may be run out into the 
 vessel being used. 
 
 A convenient stopcock consists of a glass bead 
 made from a rod a little larger in diameter than 
 the bore of the bit of rubber tubing attached to 
 
 the burette. This bead is 
 slipped into the rubber 
 tube between the burette pig. * 
 and the delivery tip. By PIPETTE 
 : B squeezing the rubber a little, 
 a channel is formed between it 
 and the bead, through which the 
 liquid in the burette may flow. 
 The size of this channel can be 
 regulated with such ease that 
 the liquid may be delivered 
 with great nicety. 
 
 The surface of liquids which 
 ^cvet glass is curved upward near 
 
 Fig. / READING A BURETTE 
 
 The correct reading is along. O. 
 
 Readings such as A and B must 
 
 not be taken 
 
Instruments for Weighing and Measuring xxv 
 
 the glass so that in small tubes the surface is concave. 
 The name of meniscus has been given to this curved 
 surface. The position of a liquid surface with respect 
 to a scale is always reckoned at the lowest point in the 
 meniscus, and the eye should be placed so that a line 
 passing from it to the tube is perpendicular to the tube 
 (Fig.y). In the case of liquids which, like mercury, do 
 not wet glass, the meniscus is convex, and readings are 
 taken at its highest point. 
 
 It is a good plan for the student to determine the 
 capacity of his test tubes, beakers, and flasks by pouring 
 water into them from one of the above vessels. Their 
 volume once determined, no time is lost in ascertaining 
 what size of beaker, flask, or test tube is to be used in 
 the experiments ; they may also serye as rough and 
 ready measuring vessels. 
 
NAME OF 
 
 ELEMENT 
 
 Aluminum _ 
 Antimony.. 
 
 Argon 
 
 Arsenic 
 
 Barium 
 
 Bismuth 
 
 Boron 
 
 Bromin 
 
 Cadmium .. 
 Calcium 
 
 Carbon 
 
 Chlorin 
 
 Chromium _ 
 Cobalt ...'.. 
 
 Copper 
 
 Fluorin 
 
 Gold 
 
 Hydrogen . . 
 
 lodin 
 
 Iron 
 
 Lead 
 
 Lithium 
 
 Magnesium 
 Manganese. 
 
 Mercury 
 
 Nickel 
 
 Nitrogen 
 
 Oxygen 
 
 Phosphorus . 
 
 Platinum 
 
 Potassium... 
 
 Silicon 
 
 Silver 
 
 Sodium 
 
 Strontium... 
 
 Sulfur 
 
 Tin .... 
 
 Zinc .. 
 
 APPENDIX D 
 TABLE I PHYSICAL CONSTANTS < 
 
 Name of Discoverer and 
 Date of Discovery 
 
 Wohler (1827) 
 
 Basil Valentine (1460) 
 
 Ramsay and Ray leigh__.( 1894) 
 Albert Magnus (i3th cent.) 
 
 Davy .(1808) 
 
 Basil Valentine (i5th cent.) 
 
 Gay-Lussac and Thenard (1808) 
 
 Balard ..(1826) 
 
 Stromeyer (1841) 
 
 Davy (1808) 
 
 Known from earliest times 
 
 Scheele ...(1774) 
 
 Vauquelin ( 1 797) 
 
 Brand (i?35) 
 
 Known from earliest times 
 
 Moissan (1886) 
 
 Known from earliest times 
 
 Cavendish (1776) 
 
 Courtois (1812) 
 
 Known from earliest times 
 
 Known from earliest times. . 
 
 Liebig and Bussy . , (1830) 
 
 Gahn and John ( I 8o7) 
 
 Known from earliest times 
 
 Cronstedt (1751) 
 
 Rutherford _. (1772) 
 
 Priestley ( 1 774) 
 
 Brand (1674) 
 
 Waston... _. (1750) 
 
 Davy (1807) 
 
 Berzelius (1823) 
 
 Known from earliest times 
 
 Davy (1807) 
 
 Davy (1808) 
 
 Known from earliest times 
 
 Known from earliest times 
 
 1 5th century 
 
 [ xxvi ] 
 
TABLES 
 
 >OME OF THE ELEMENTS 
 
 Atomic Weights 
 
 Valence 
 
 Melting 
 Point 
 
 Boiling 
 Point 
 
 Specific 
 Gravity l 
 
 H = i 
 
 O - ib 
 
 Approxi 
 mate 
 
 26 9 
 19-3 
 
 1Q.6 
 
 27.1 
 120.2 
 TO. 9 
 
 27 
 
 120 
 4O 
 
 III. 
 
 Ill, V 
 
 700 (?) 
 440 
 
 -) 
 1300 (?) 
 
 2.67 
 6. 7 2 
 
 J ' V 
 
 74-4 
 
 .9 y v 
 75-o 
 
 T- W 
 
 75 
 
 III, V 
 
 446-457 
 
 Red heat 
 
 5-69 
 
 36.4 
 
 137-4 
 
 137 
 
 II 
 
 Above that 
 of cast iron 
 
 ) 
 
 3-75 
 
 06.9 
 
 208.5 
 
 208 
 
 III, V 
 
 268 
 
 1700 
 
 9.9 
 
 10.9 
 
 II. 
 
 ii 
 
 III 
 
 In electric 
 furnace 
 
 p 
 
 2.6 
 
 79-36 
 
 79.96 
 
 80 
 
 I 
 
 7-3 
 
 63 
 
 3.1 (liq.) 
 
 ii. 6 
 
 112.4 
 
 112 
 
 II 
 
 320 
 
 770 
 
 8.72 
 
 39-8 
 
 40.1 
 
 40 
 
 II 
 
 Red heat 
 
 p 
 
 i. 6-1. 8 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ( 
 
 Diamond 3.5 
 
 11.91 
 
 12.00 
 
 12 
 
 IV 
 
 p 
 
 ? \ 
 
 Graphite 2.2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 Charcoal 1.5 
 
 35-18 
 
 35-45 
 
 35-5 
 
 I 
 
 IO2 
 
 34 
 
 1-33 (liq-) 
 
 5i-7 
 
 52.1 
 
 5 2 
 
 II, III 
 
 p 
 
 p 
 
 6-7 
 
 58.56 
 
 59-o 
 
 59 
 
 II 
 
 1800 
 
 p 
 
 8.6 
 
 63.1 
 
 63.6 
 
 63-5 
 
 I, II 
 
 IO5O 
 
 ? 
 
 8.9 
 
 18.9 
 
 19. 
 
 ig 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 ? 
 
 95 7 
 
 197.2 
 
 197 
 
 III 
 
 1030 
 
 p 
 
 19-3 
 
 l.OOO 
 
 1.008 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 
 252. 5 
 
 i 
 
 25.90 
 
 126.85 
 
 127 
 
 I 
 
 114 
 
 1 20 
 
 4-95 
 
 55-5 
 
 55-9 
 
 56 
 
 II, III 
 
 I TOO 
 
 p 
 
 7.88 
 
 05-35 
 
 206.9 
 
 207 
 
 II, IV 
 
 325 
 
 p 
 
 n-37 
 
 6.98 
 
 7-03 
 
 7 
 
 I 
 
 1 80 
 
 p 
 
 o-59 
 
 24.18 
 
 24.36 
 
 24 
 
 II 
 
 750 
 
 1 100 
 
 i-75 
 
 54.6 
 
 55-o 
 
 55 
 
 TI 
 
 
 
 7-2 
 
 98.5 
 
 200 
 
 200 
 
 j I 
 
 -38:9 
 
 357 
 
 13-59 
 
 58-3 
 
 58-7 
 
 58.5 
 
 ,i 
 
 1600 
 
 p 
 
 8.9 
 
 13-93 
 
 14.04 
 
 H 
 
 III, V 
 
 2O3 
 
 194 
 
 13-93 
 
 15.88 
 
 16.00 
 
 16 
 
 II 
 
 
 1825 
 
 15.88 
 
 30.77 
 
 31.0 
 
 3i 
 
 III, V 
 
 44.2 
 
 287] 
 
 Yellow 1.83 
 Red 2.21 
 
 93 3 
 
 194-8 
 
 195 
 
 IV 
 
 2000 
 
 p 
 
 21-5 
 
 38.86 
 
 39-15 
 
 39 
 
 I 
 
 62.1 
 
 667 
 
 4.9 
 
 28.2 
 
 28 4 
 
 28 
 
 IV 
 
 Above cast 
 iron 
 
 p 
 
 2-5 
 
 07. 12 
 
 107 93 
 
 108 
 
 I 
 
 IOOO 
 
 p 
 
 10.5 
 
 22.88 
 
 23-05 
 
 23 
 
 I 
 
 97-6 
 
 742 
 
 0-97 
 
 86.94 
 
 87.6 
 
 87 
 
 II 
 
 Red heat 
 
 p 
 
 2-5 
 
 31.83 
 
 32.06 
 
 32 
 
 IIJV.VI 
 
 II4-5 
 
 448 
 
 2.0 
 
 18.1 
 
 119.0 
 
 119 
 
 II, IV 
 
 227 
 
 1600 
 
 7-3 
 
 64.9 
 
 65-4 
 
 65 
 
 II 
 
 420 
 
 930 
 
 7-i 
 
 i Referred to water if the element be in a solid or a liquid state ; to 
 tydrogen if in a gaseous state. 
 
 [ xxvii ] 
 
xxviii Elementary Chemistry 
 
 TABLE II TENSION OF WATER VAPOR 
 
 15 
 
 12 -itnm. 
 
 21 
 
 20 gfnm. 
 
 16 
 
 I7.K mm. 
 
 2_1 C 
 
 222 7#W. 
 
 17 
 
 14 4//tt. 
 
 25 
 
 27 >mm. 
 
 18 
 
 15 ^mm. 
 
 26 
 
 2Z omm. 
 
 10 
 
 1 6 3/w. 
 
 27 
 
 26 t; /#/. 
 
 20 . 
 
 ij.^mm. 
 
 28 
 
 28 I w. 
 
 21 
 
 1 8 ^tnm. 
 
 2Q 
 
 29 Sim. 
 
 
 ig -jmm. 
 
 30 
 
 v i.e. mm. 
 
 
 
 
 
 TABLE III SOLUTIONS TO BE PREPARED 
 
 The figures in parentheses indicate the number of cubic centi- 
 meters (if the substance is a liquid) and the number of grams (if 
 the substance is a solid) that are to be dissolved in water ; the 
 solution should then be diluted to one liter. 
 
 Acetic acid, (140) of 80$ acid. 
 
 Alum (any one), (100). 
 
 Aluminum chlorid, (TOO). 
 
 Aluminum sulfate, (25). 
 
 Ammonium carbonate. Dis- 
 solve 2oo<?"- in a mixture of 
 100^- of cone. NH 4 OH and 
 600 c.c. of water, and after solu- 
 tion is complete dilute to one 
 liter. 
 
 Ammonium chlorid, (100). 
 
 Ammonium hydroxid, (250) of 
 cone. NH 4 OH. 
 
 Ammonium molybdate. Dis- 
 solve $og- of molybdic acid in 
 a mixture of 100^- of cone. 
 NH 4 OH and I$QC.C. of water. 
 Dilute 250^- of cone, nitric 
 acid with $QQC.C. of water and 
 pour into first solution slowly 
 and with constant stirring. 
 Let stand in a warm place for 
 48 hours and decant the clear 
 supernatant solution for use. 
 
 Ammonium nitrate, (25). 
 
 Ammonium oxalate, (50). 
 
 Ammonium polysulfid. Dis- 
 solve some sulfur in ammo- 
 nium sulfid solution. 
 
 Ammonium sulfid. Pass H 2 S 
 into one liter of cone. NH 4 OH 
 to saturation. Then add 
 750 c.c. cone. NH 4 OH and one 
 liter of water. 
 
 Ammonium sulfocyanid (also 
 called thiocyanate), (10). 
 
 Antimony chlorid. Dissolve 
 25^- in a mixture of 250^- 
 of cone. HC1 and 750 c.c. of 
 water. 
 
 Arsenic chlorid. Dissolve 50^- 
 sodium arsenite, Na 3 AsO 3 , 
 in i ,000^- c. of water and add in 
 small portions cone. HC1 until 
 further addition occasions no 
 effervescence. 
 
 Barium carbonate. In suspen- 
 sion in water. 
 
Tables 
 
 xxix 
 
 Barium chloric! , (60). 
 
 Barium hydroxid. Dissolve 50^- 
 in one liter of hot water, let 
 stand over night, and filter or 
 decant. Keep in tightly 
 stoppered bottle. 
 
 Bismuth nitrate, (25). The solu- 
 tion must contain a little free 
 nitric acid. 
 
 Boric acid, (40). Saturated solu- 
 tion. 
 
 Bromin solution. Dissolve 2^- 
 of KBr in 250 c.c. of water, 
 add 6<"- (2 c.c.) of bromin, and 
 shake until bromin is dis- 
 solved, 
 
 Bromin water. Put 4o<?"-(i3 c.c.) 
 in a liter of water. Keep bot- 
 tle tightly stoppered and in 
 the dark. 
 
 Cadmium chlorid, (25). 
 
 Calcium chlorid, (25). 
 
 Calcium hydroxid, (lime water). 
 Put some freshly slaked lime 
 in a bottle, fill bottle with 
 water, shake, and when solu- 
 tion is clear, decant and reject 
 'it, as it may contain some 
 impurities from the lime. 
 Fill the bottle with water 
 again and shake well. 
 
 Calcium sulfate. . Prepare satu- 
 rated solution in same manner 
 as lime water above. 
 
 Chromium chlorid, (25). To 
 ijoooc-c. of potassium dichro- 
 mate solution add $oc.c. of 
 cone. HC1 and 25 c.c. of alco- 
 hol. Boil for half an hour 
 gently and, if, after standing 
 over night, the solution is not 
 
 clear green add more alcohol 
 and boil again. 
 
 Chromium sulfate, (30). 
 
 Chlorin water. Pass chlorin 
 gas into water until it smells 
 strongly of the gas. Better 
 make small quantities when 
 needed by adding a little 
 cone. HC1 to a few crystals of 
 KC1O 3 in a test tube and as 
 soon as the gas escapes from 
 mouth of tube, adding water 
 to stop reaction. 
 
 Cobalt chlorid, (50). 
 
 Cobalt nitrate, (35). 
 
 Cochineal. Grind a little with 
 water and dilute to desired 
 tint. 
 
 Copper nitrate, (40). 
 
 Copper sulfate, (35). 
 
 Disodium hydrogen phosphate, 
 (120). 
 
 Ferric chlorid, (100). 
 
 Ferrous sulfate. Dissolve i5o<?"- 
 of clear crystals in one liter 
 of water, and add 5 c.c. of cone. 
 H 2 SO 4 and a few pieces of 
 iron (tacks or small nails). 
 
 Hydrochloric acid, (250) of cone, 
 acid. 
 
 Indigo. Slowly add lotf- of 
 powdered indigo to 25 c.c. of 
 fuming sulfuric acid. Let 
 stand for a day and then add 
 slowly with constant stirring 
 to one liter of water. 
 
 Lead acetate, (90). 
 
 Lead nitrate, (40). 
 
 Litmus. Grind a little with 
 water to a paste and dilute to 
 desired tint. 
 
XXX 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 Magnesium chlorid, (25). 
 
 Magnesium sulfate, (100). 
 
 Manganous chlorid, (75). 
 
 Manganous sulfate, (35). 
 
 Mercuric chlorid, (30). 
 
 Nessler's Reagent. Dissolve 
 35^"- of potassium iodid in 
 100 c.c. of water ; also dissolve 
 16^"- of mercuric chlorid in 
 300^-^ of water. Add the 
 latter solution to the former 
 slowly with constant stirring 
 until the precipitate ceases to 
 be redissolved. Then add a 
 solution of 65<?"- of potassium 
 hydroxid in 60 c.c. of water 
 and filter. Put the solution 
 into a number of small bottles 
 and cover the corks with par- 
 affin. Keep in a cool, dark 
 place, and when the solution 
 is needed, do not open more 
 than one bottle at a time. 
 
 Nickel chlorid, (25). 
 
 Nickel nitrate, (35). 
 
 Nitric acid, (250) of cone. acid. 
 
 Phenolphthalein. Dissolve one 
 gram in IOQC.C. o f alcohol and 
 dilute with water until a pre- 
 cipitate begins to form ; then 
 add enough alcohol to clarify 
 solution. 
 
 Platinum chlorid. Use com- 
 mercial solution, or, dissolve 
 scrap platinum in aqua regia, 
 evaporate nearly to dryness, 
 and dissolve residue in enough 
 water to make about 10 per 
 cent solution. 
 
 Potassium bromid, (30). 
 
 Potassium chromate, (100). 
 
 Potassium chlorid, (50). 
 
 Potassium dichromate, (50). 
 
 Potassium ferricyanid, (30). 
 
 Potassium ferrocyanid, (50). 
 
 Potassium hydroxid, (150). 
 
 Potassium iodid, (25). 
 
 Potassium nitrate, (100). 
 
 Potassium sulfate, (100). 
 
 Potassium sulfocyanate, (50). 
 
 Silver nitrate, (40). Keep in 
 amber glass bottle. 
 
 Sodium acetate, (130). 
 
 Sodium ammonium phosphate, 
 (7o). 
 
 Sodium chlorid, (100). 
 
 Sodium hydroxid, (175). 
 
 Sodium sulfite, (200). 
 
 Stannous chlorid. Dissolve 
 So.?"- in IOQC.C. of hot cone. 
 HC1 and keep a few pieces of 
 tin in the solution. Make 
 only when needed, as it does 
 not keep well. 
 
 Starch paste. Grind about 
 lotf- to a paste with a little 
 cold water, then boil with 
 250 c.c. of water until clear. 
 
 Strontium chlorid, (30). 
 
 Strontium nitrate, (30). 
 
 Sulfuric acid, (250) of cone. acid. 
 Pour acid in small portions, 
 with stirring, into the full 
 amount of water required for 
 dilution. 
 
 Tartar emetic, (100). 
 
 Zinc chlorid, (50). 
 
 Zinc sulfate, (140). 
 
APPENDIX E 
 
 SIGNIFICANT FIGURES AND FORMS OF 
 RECORD IN QUANTITATIVE WORK 
 
 All the figures of a number are called significant 
 excepting the ciphers at the right of a whole number 
 and the ciphers at the left of a decimal fraction ; thus, 
 the significant figures of 30,600 as well as of 0.000306 
 are 306. 
 
 In all measurements one significant figure more than 
 is known to be correct is kept in the number express- 
 ing the result of the measurement ; this figure is said 
 to be the least accurate figure or the doubtful figure of 
 the number. Thus, suppose the volumes of water dis- 
 placed from an aspirating bottle in three determinations 
 of the weight of a liter of oxygen (Experiment 16) were 
 found to be in each case, 1685 c - c -, 1680 c - c -, and 1689 c - c - , 
 the sum of these three numbers is 5054, and their mean 
 is 1684.666 -f c.c. 9 or 1684.66! c-c; or 1684.67^-. No one 
 of these is proper, for each assumes a greater accuracy 
 than we have any warrant for ; moreover, the second is 
 irrational in its combining a common with a decimal 
 fraction. The three determinations differ in units' 
 place ; hence, we are not sure of units' place. We must 
 accordingly drop the entire decimal part of the average 
 number ; but as the decimal is greater than 0.5, it is 
 customary to change the figure 4 in the average to 5, so 
 that the average is 1685. If the decimal had been less 
 than 5, it would have been dropped, and the average 
 would have remained 1684. 
 
 [ xxxi ] 
 
xxxii Elementary Chemistry 
 
 Again, suppose that in three weighings of a dish the 
 following results were obtained: 24.^^^-^ 24. 35^-, and 
 24.32^-. The sum of these numbers is 73.00, and their 
 average arithmetically may be 24.3333 + or 2 4-33y, but 
 if the above rules be observed, the average must be 
 24.33. It i s to be noted that the sum is given as 73.00 
 and not as 73. By writing the two ciphers in the deci- 
 mal we indicate that we know that the tenths and hun- 
 dredths are zero, while the 73 without the ciphers leaves 
 us in doubt. 
 
 Let another illustration emphasize this last point. 
 Suppose the weight of a vessel be found on a balance 
 sensitive to a hundredth of a gram, but that neither the 
 tenths nor the hundredths gram-weights are needed 
 to secure equilibrium, ilf only the ten- and two-gram 
 weights are on the pan of the balance, its weight is 
 written i2.oo<?"- and not just 12^-. The ciphers indicate 
 the degree of accuracy attained. They mean that the 
 tenths and hundredths were tried in determining the 
 weight, but were not needed. By expressing a weight 
 as 12.00^- you indicate that a balance sensitive to hun- 
 dredths of grams was used, while 12.0^- would mean 
 that a balance sensitive only to tenths of grams was 
 employed. 
 
 In the directions for the quantitative experiments 
 the degree of accuracy is denoted by the number of 
 decimal places kept in specifying a quantity to be taken. 
 Thus, in Experiment 46, exactly 2.00^- are specified, 
 which means that on a balance sensitive to hundredths 
 of grams, two grams, and not more or less by a hun- 
 dredth of a gram, are to be taken. In Experiment 16 
 the directions are to take about 5 & of manganese dioxid. 
 This quantity may be weighed roughly, that is, to about 
 a gram, it making no difference if 4^- or 6^- should hap- 
 pen to be taken. If the amount had been written 5.0 &-, 
 
Significant Figures and Forms of Record xxxiii 
 
 it would have been necessary to use a more sensitive 
 balance and weigh to tenths of grams. 
 
 Suppose that it were found that 2.68<^- of oxygen 
 occupied a volume of 1,871 c - c -, i. e., 1.871 L . Then the 
 quotient of 2.68 divided by 1.871 gives the weight of one 
 liter. The question arises : How many figures of the 
 quotient are to be retained ? It is apparent that if only 
 weighings to hundredths of grams were made, then 
 only hundredths should be kept. Accordingly the 
 quotient is 1.43. 
 
 Arithmetical operations on data obtained in quanti- 
 tative experiments may be much abbreviated, with no 
 loss in accuracy, by dropping after an operation of mul- 
 tiplication or division all except the significant figures 
 in a number. 
 
 To illustrate, let us solve the following problem : 
 Find the reduced volume of 283 c - c - of a gas measured 
 at 662 >> and 22. 
 
 It is to be noted that no one of the three numbers 
 given has more than three figures ; hence, there are 
 only three significant figures. Substituting in the for- 
 mula ( 27), we have 
 
 Below are given two calculations of the value of V, 
 the one to the right retaining all figures after each mul- 
 tiplication, the one to the left retaining in each product 
 only three (significant) figures. 
 
 283 283 
 
 273 273 
 
 849 
 1981 
 566 
 
 77259 77259 
 
 3b 
 
xxxiv Elementary Chemistry 
 
 773 77259 
 
 662 662 
 
 4638 463554 
 
 4638 463554 
 
 5^726 5H45458 
 
 2 95 295 
 
 760 760 
 
 17700 17700 
 
 2065 2065 
 
 224200 224200 
 
 224) 512(228.5 224200) 51145458 (228.1 
 
 448 " 
 
 _ 
 
 640 6305 
 
 448 4484 
 
 1920 18214 
 
 I79 2 17936 
 
 1280 2785 
 
 As is seen, the reduced volumes differ only in the 
 first decimal place. But as the units are doubtful, the 
 tenths are not significant. As the tenths in 228.5 i g -5> 
 the number according to custom is increased to 229. It 
 is thus manifest that the abbreviated operations give as 
 good results as the detailed one. 
 
 FORMS OF RECORD OF DATA 
 
 It always saves time and energy to enter data as soon 
 as obtained in some approved tabular form. Always 
 use a note book, never a scrap of paper. Preserve all 
 the arithmetical work so that, if necessary, it may be 
 checked up with a second determination. Some forms 
 of tabular entries are given at the end of the directions 
 
Forms of Record of Data xxxv 
 
 for the performance of various experiments. A very 
 common operation in quantitative work is the fol- 
 lowing : 
 
 A dish or other vessel is weighed, some substance 
 placed in it, and a second weighing made. The differ- 
 ence in the weights gives the weight of the substance. 
 A good form of record for this operation is this : 
 
 Wt. of dish, crucible, or test tube + substance = 47. 63^"- 
 
 Wt. " _.. _ = 23.42^"- 
 
 Wt. of substance = 24. 21^"- 
 
 Suppose a substance is being heated to constant 
 weight in an evaporating dish. A convenient form of 
 record is the following : 
 
 Wt. of dish + substance after heating for 20 min = 47.84^- 
 
 Wt. " + " " 10 " more = 47.67^- 
 
 Wt. + " 10 " " = 47.63<r- 
 
 Wt. " + " " " " 10 " " = 47.63^- 
 
 Wt. " = 23. 42 <r- 
 
 Wt. of substance = 24. 21^"- 
 
 Other similar forms may be readily devised by the 
 student. It is a good plan to decide upon what form 
 of record is to be used before commencing a quantita- 
 tive experiment. The very preparation of a form often 
 helps wonderfully in keeping track of the steps in an 
 experiment. 
 
APPENDIX F 
 
 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT 
 
 The subjoined lists contain the apparatus and the chemicals 
 required for the experiments in this book. Prices and quantities 
 have not been given, but the author will be pleased to give infor- 
 mation to teachers using the book as to the quantities of apparatus 
 and chemicals used by his own classes. Prices may be obtained 
 from any of the dealers in chemical supplies. 
 
 LIST A 
 
 i 
 
 INDIVIDUAL APPARATUS 
 
 This list comprises the pieces of apparatus constantly used by 
 a single student, who should be provided with each piece. 
 
 Iron tongs. 
 Platinum wire. 
 Blowpipe. 
 Iron forceps. 
 'Triangular file, 6". 
 'Round file, 8". 
 Wire gauze or asbestos board. 
 'Wing-top burner. 
 Mortar and pestle, 4". 
 Iron spoon. 
 2 Derlagrating spoon, 
 i 2 Glass rod, 5". 
 i Two-hole rubber stopper to 
 
 fit large test tubes. 
 3 ft. rubber tubing, 3/ 16 ". 
 3 ft. glass tubing, medium wall, 
 
 Test tubes, 
 
 Test tubes, 6x^". 
 
 Test tubes, gx i". 
 
 Beaker, 100 c. c. 
 
 Beaker, 250 c. c. 
 
 Flask, 100 c. c. 
 
 Flask, 250 c. c. 
 
 Retort, 250 c. c. 
 
 Glass plates, 4x4". 
 
 Thistle tube. 
 
 Funnel, 2^". 
 'Porcelain crucible, i oz. 
 'Pipestem triangle. 
 
 Evaporating dish, 3". 
 2 Test-tube holder. 
 2 Test-tube brush. 
 
 Test-tube rack. 
 
 to fit rubber stopper. 
 
 1 These pieces of apparatus may be used by several students in common. 
 
 2 These pieces of apparatus may readily be made by the student himself. 
 
 [ xxxvi ] 
 
Laboratory Equipment 
 
 xxxvii 
 
 LIST B 
 
 TABLE APPARATUS 
 
 This list includes the apparatus which should be kept at the 
 laboratory desk used by the student or on a side table. It is a 
 part of the equipment to be used by different classes. 
 
 'Mohr pinch-cocks. 
 
 'Iron and copper wire. 
 
 'Sand. 
 
 'Graduated cylinders, looc. c. 
 and 500 c. c. 
 
 'Bar magnets. 
 
 'Splinters of wood. 
 
 'Wax tapers. 
 
 'Meter sticks. 
 
 'Trip scales and weights. 
 
 'Chaslyn balances. 
 
 i It is not feasible to give quantities for these articles ; as many as 
 possible should be provided, although it is possible to get along with few. 
 
 i Retort stand with two rings 
 
 and a clamp. 
 6 Wide-mouthed bottles or 
 
 receivers. 
 
 i Pneumatic trough, 
 i Bunsen burner. 
 3 ft. rubber hose for attaching 
 
 Bunsen burner. 
 '"Acid bottles." 
 'Assorted corks. 
 'Hofmann screw-cocks. 
 
 LIST C 
 DEMONSTRATION APPARATUS 
 
 This list comprises the apparatus which the teacher should 
 have for demonstrating experiments. It should be of the best 
 quality and not mere makeshift. 
 
 i Eudiometer and trough, 
 i Electrolysis of water appa- 
 ratus. 
 i Safety tube. 
 
 1 Kipp's gas generator (it is 
 
 well to have two or three 
 all charged and ready to 
 deliver at any time such 
 gases as hydrogen, carbon 
 dioxid, etc.). 
 
 2 U-tubes, 6" and 8". 
 i Liebig's condenser. 
 
 Thermometer. 
 Bulb tube. 
 Induction coil. 
 Battery to run coil. 
 Large lamp chimney. 
 'Rubber stoppers of various 
 
 sizes. 
 
 'Ignition tubes. 
 'Supply of glass tubing of 
 
 various sizes. 
 
 'Supply of rubber tubing of 
 various sizes. 
 
 i Refer to note in List B. 
 
XXXV111 
 
 Elementary Chemistry 
 
 LIST D 
 
 CHEMICALS 
 
 The chemicals should as far as possible be of " c. p." grade. 
 
 Acid, acetic. 
 
 citric. 
 
 hydrochloric. 
 
 nitric. 
 
 oxalic. 
 
 pyrogallic. 
 
 sulfuric. 
 
 tartaric. 
 Alcohol, ethyl. 
 
 methyl. 
 Alum, chrome. 
 
 potash. 
 Aluminum, metal. 
 
 sulfate. 
 Ammonium, chlorid. 
 
 hydroxid. 
 
 nitrate. 
 
 oxalate. 
 
 sulfid. 
 
 Antimony, metal. 
 Arsenic, metal. 
 Arsenious oxid. 
 Asbestos. 
 Barium, chlorid. 
 
 nitrate. 
 Bismuth, metal. 
 
 nitrate. 
 
 Bleaching powder. 
 Borax. 
 
 Cadmium chlorid. 
 Calcium, carbid. 
 
 carbonate (marble). 
 
 chlorid. 
 
 fluorid. 
 
 oxid (lime). 
 
 sulfate (gypsum). 
 
 Carbon bisulfid. 
 Charcoal, animal. 
 
 wood. 
 Coal, hard. 
 
 soft. 
 Cobalt, chlorid. 
 
 nitrate. 
 Cochineal. 
 Copper, metal. 
 
 nitrate. 
 
 sulfate. 
 Ether. 
 Glycerin. 
 Indigo, 
 lodin. 
 Iron, metal (filings and wire). 
 
 chlorid. 
 
 sulfate. 
 
 sulfid. 
 Lead, metal. 
 
 nitrate. 
 
 monoxid (litharge). 
 
 red. 
 Litmus, 
 
 paper. 
 
 Magnesium, metal (powdered 
 and ribbon). 
 
 sulfate. 
 Manganese, dioxid. 
 
 sulfate. 
 Mercury. 
 Mercuric chlorid. 
 
 nitrate. 
 
 oxid. 
 
 Mercurous nitrate. 
 Nickel chlorid. 
 
Laboratory Equipment xxxix 
 
 Phenolphthalein. Sodium, metal. 
 Picture cord (iron). bicarbonate. 
 
 Potassium, metal. carbonate. 
 
 bromid. chlorid. 
 
 carbonate. hydroxid. 
 
 chlorate. nitrate. 
 
 chromate. phosphate. 
 
 dichromate. silicate. 
 
 ferricyanid. sulfate. 
 
 ferrocyanid. sulfite. 
 
 hydroxid. Stannous chlorid. 
 
 iodid. Starch. 
 
 permanganate. Strontium nitrate. 
 
 sulfate. Sulfur, flowers and roll. 
 
 sulfocyanid. Tin, granulated. 
 
 Rosin. Vaseline. 
 
 Silver nitrate. Zinc, granulated and sheet. 
 Soda-lime. sulfate. 
 
W^TT^ 
 
 -5, '43 (6061 S) 
 
V/D \ / r\ / * 
 ID IDOO4 
 
 50